JP5157731B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

  A game machine (such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine) that gives a game value (game ball, game medal, etc.) as a prize to a player when a predetermined bonus condition is satisfied is known as a general game machine.

In contrast to such a general gaming machine, Patent Document 1 discloses that when a predetermined bonus condition is satisfied, a game value (game medal) is awarded to a player as a prize, and a privilege is granted based on a predetermined criterion. When the game is permitted, a gaming machine (slot machine) that gives a player a privilege (privilege data) different from the game value is described.
JP 2002-224283 A

  However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is merely configured to be able to acquire a privilege different from the gaming value in a conventional general gaming machine, there is a problem in the conventional general gaming machine. It was still inadequate to solve the lack of variation (variation) in gameplay. Therefore, there has been a problem that as the player's game time becomes longer, the tendency that the player feels monotonous and gets bored with the game cannot be eliminated.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that can give a new added value that allows a player to maintain interest in the game over a long period of time. It is an object.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 plays a game using a game medium, and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined special value. A special value medium providing means for providing a special value medium having a special value different from the game value when the condition is satisfied, and the special value medium that is provided next time by the special value medium providing means. Value content detection means for detecting the content of value, and condition change for changing the special value provision condition for the special value medium to be given next time according to the content of the special value detected by the value content detection means Means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is provided with counting means for counting the number of times that the predetermined state occurs in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the special value imparting condition is in accordance with the number of times counted by the counting means. And the condition changing means calculates the number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value granting condition according to the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting means. To change.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second counting means for counting the number of times that a state different from the state to be counted by the counting means is generated; Selection means for selecting whether the value assignment condition is a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting means or a condition according to the number of times counted by the second count means; and the special value assignment Second condition changing means for changing the condition to the condition selected by the selecting means, wherein the condition changing means counts the special value imparting condition by the counting means by the second condition changing means. When the condition is changed according to the number of times, the first counting means required for satisfying the special value granting condition according to the special value content detected by the value content detecting means When the number of times counted is changed, on the other hand, when the special value provision condition is changed to a condition according to the number of times counted by the second counting means by the second condition changing means, The number of times counted by the second counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition is changed according to the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the counting means and the second counting means count before the condition is changed by the second condition changing means. It keeps the number of times it was doing.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and on the other hand, Different special values are given by special value giving means.

  Here, the special value content of the special value medium to be assigned next time is detected by the value content detection means, and the special value assignment condition for the special value medium to be assigned next time is detected by the condition changing means. It is changed according to the content of the special value detected by the means.

  Therefore, since the frequency of the special value medium changes according to the content of the special value, the game can be inflated, and the player can maintain interest in the game for a longer period of time. effective.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is obtained. Depending on the content of the special value detected by the value content detection means, the number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition, that is, the number of times that the predetermined state occurs is the condition change means. It is changed by. Therefore, since the frequency of granting the special value medium can be changed, the progress of the game can be suppressed, and the player can maintain the interest in the game for a longer period of time. There is.

  At this time, if the special value granting condition is based on the occurrence of a common gaming state, the player can sensuously grasp the ease or difficulty of acquiring the special value medium (special value). . Therefore, the player's expectation for the acquisition of the special value medium can be raised, and a situation where it is difficult to feel bored with the game can be created.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the following effect is produced. The special value imparting condition is a condition corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means (that is, the number of times a certain state has occurred), or the number of times counted by the second counting means (that is, counted by the counting means) If the selection means selects whether the condition depends on the number of times that a state different from the state occurs), the special value imparting condition is changed to the condition selected by the selection means by the second condition changing means. The

  At this time, when the special value granting condition is changed by the second condition changing means to the condition corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means, according to the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, The number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition is changed by the condition changing means. On the other hand, when the special value granting condition is changed by the second condition changing means to a condition corresponding to the number of times counted by the second counting means, the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting means Accordingly, the number of times counted by the second counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition is changed by the condition changing means.

  Therefore, there are many changes in the special value provision conditions for obtaining the special value medium (special value), and there is an effect that it is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult to feel bored with the game. Here, by allowing the selection by the selection means to be performed based on the player's intention (for example, an input for instructing which to select), the player can make a special reflection of his / her intention. Since value-adding conditions can be selected and the player's consciousness can be made easier to acquire a special value medium, it is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to feel bored with the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the following effect is produced. When the condition is changed by the second condition changing means, the count means which has been counted before or the number of times counted by the second counting means is held. Even if the condition is returned after changing the value, it is possible to count from the continuation before the change.

  Therefore, the special value imparting condition is appropriately set to a condition corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means (that is, the number of times a certain state occurs), or the number of times counted by the second counting means (that is, counted by the counting means). The number of special value-adding conditions for obtaining special value media (special value) is abundant, making it difficult to feel bored with the game. There is an effect that a situation can be created.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17.

  The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made.

  Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance.

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  An opening 54 for paying out bonus coins C (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, is formed on the left side of the lower plate 50. Below the opening 54, coins for receiving paid bonus coins C are received. The dispensing tray 53 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened. A bonus coin payout device 450 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is provided on the back side of the lower plate unit 15 as a payout device for the bonus coin C to be paid out from the opening 54.

  On the left side of the coin payout tray 53, a coin information reading device 300 is formed to project forward. A concave coin receiving portion 300a is formed on the upper surface of the coin information reading device 300, and the privilege coin C can be detachably attached to the coin receiving portion 300a. Yes.

  Further, the coin information reading device 300 has a receiving part IC tag reader 302 (see FIG. 8), and an IC tag 602 (FIG. 7) embedded in the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving part 300a. The coin information as a special value can be read by wireless communication using a transmission medium.

  A coin effect button 301 is provided on the front surface (the surface on the front view side) of the coin information reading device 300. The coin effect button 301 is displayed when the player desires to reach a reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving unit 300a, or in a state where a reach effect as a privilege appears. This is a button that can be operated by the player when it is not necessary to display the reach production.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14 c of the front frame 14. Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner circumference 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 surround the front and rear. A game area to be played is formed. The game area is a substantially circular area that is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in a normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state, Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being probable is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Furthermore, during the probability change in this embodiment, the game is in a state where the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is short-running, it means a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 3). . In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electric accessory is released per hit are changed. It is good as a thing.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of the ball of the second entrance 67 as a trigger.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, and for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, or the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of held times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and the number of lights of the holding lamp 85. Four hold lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically held in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) by the frequency | count. In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not perform lighting display.

  The second symbol display device 82 includes a second symbol display unit 83 and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the display unit 83 displays a display symbol (second symbol). The symbol “○” and “x” in FIG. 1 are alternately lit to display a variation, and the variation display is stopped when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol “◯”). The entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of passes through the second entrance 67 of the sphere is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspensions is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit on the hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. You may make it carry out using a part of. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, and is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less (for example, (8 times). In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (a part of the various switches 208) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 8)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. Can be visually recognized through the small window 35.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 and a second entrance (through gate) 67. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG.4 and FIG.5, the privilege coin payout apparatus 450 which is the payout apparatus which pays out the privilege coin C is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the privilege coin payout device 450. 5A and 5B are perspective views showing the bottom member 462 in the bonus coin payout device 450, and FIG. 5C is a perspective view showing the standby member 470.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the bonus coin payout device 450 is a temporary storage unit 460 that can store a plurality of bonus coins C and is temporarily separated from the storage member 460 before the bonus coins C are paid out from the opening 54. And a standby member 470 which is a typical standby part.

  The storage member 460 in the privilege coin payout device 450 is a cylindrical peripheral wall member 461, a bottom member 462 that is positioned on the lower end side of the peripheral wall member 461, and is movably provided with respect to the peripheral wall member 461, and the peripheral wall member 461. And a coin supply solenoid 464 (see FIG. 8) serving as a driving source for moving the bottom member 462 in the front-rear direction (arrow F direction and the opposite direction) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461. Have.

  In the internal space formed by the peripheral wall member 461 and the bottom member 462, a plurality of privilege coins C can be stacked and accommodated in the thickness direction. The lid member 463 is configured to be removable, and can be removed as necessary, for example, when the bonus coin C is replenished in the internal space formed by the peripheral wall member 461 and the bottom member 462. The lid member 463 is provided with a biasing member 463a that biases the stacked privilege coins C from above in order to stabilize the payout of the privilege coins C.

  The bottom member 462 includes a peripheral wall portion 462a having an inner peripheral wall communicating with the inner peripheral wall of the peripheral wall member 461, and a bottom lid portion 462b provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the peripheral wall member 462a by turning around a shaft 462c. have.

  When the bottom member 462 is closed, the depth (height) of the inner space formed by the peripheral wall portion 462a and the bottom lid portion 462b is the number of sheets that are paid out at one time (this embodiment). In the embodiment, it is configured to be able to accommodate one privilege coin C.

  Specifically, in the state where the bottom cover 462b is closed, the depth y of the internal space formed by the peripheral wall 462a and the bottom cover 462b is set to the thickness of the privilege coin C as x. When the number of privilege coins C to be paid out is a, the depth is such that the relationship of “(a−1) x <y ≦ ax” is established. A slight offset α (for example, α is about 1/10 of the thickness x of the bonus coin C) is provided so as not to affect the number of bonus coins C to be paid out at one time, and the peripheral wall portion 462a and the bottom lid portion 462b. The depth y of the internal space formed from the above may be a depth satisfying the relationship of “(a−1) x <y ≦ a (x + α)”.

  The bottom lid portion 462b is rotated and opened around the shaft 462c by its own weight, so that the bottom lid portion 462b shifts from the closed state (the state shown in FIG. 5A) to the open state (the state shown in FIG. 5B). It is configured. As shown in FIG. 4, a support member 465 is provided below the storage member 460. When the storage member 460 is in a normal state (the state shown in FIG. 4), the upper end 465b of the support member 465 is By supporting the bottom lid portion 462b, the bottom lid portion 462b is kept closed.

  On the other hand, when the bottom member 462 is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461 and reaches the position where the bottom lid portion 462b of the bottom member 462 is not supported by the upper end 465b of the support member 465, the bottom of the bottom member 462 The lid 462b rotates around the shaft 462c by its own weight and is opened, and as a result, the one privilege coin C stored in the bottom member 462 is supplied (transferred) to the standby member 470 (FIG. 6 ( a)).

  When the bottom cover 462b of the bottom member 462 is removed from the support by the upper end 465b of the support member 465, the bottom cover 462b is supported by the slope 465a that is inclined downward toward the lower dish unit 15 side of the support member 465. It is configured not to be opened beyond the inclination of 465a.

  In addition, when the bottom member 462 is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461, a special coin other than the single special coin C supplied to the standby member 470, that is, the peripheral wall member 461 A support plate 462d that prohibits movement of the privilege coin C remaining in the internal space is provided.

  On the other hand, the standby member 470 in the privilege coin payout device 450 includes a main body portion 471 and a coin payout solenoid 472 serving as a drive source for moving the main body portion 471 in the vertical direction (arrow U direction and the opposite direction) (see FIG. 8). And have.

  The main body portion 471 includes an inclined surface 471a that is inclined downward toward the lower dish unit 15 side, and a rib 471b that is erected around the storage member 460 side. In the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 4), the main body 471 is positioned below the opening 54 of the lower dish unit 15 and is moved upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by being driven by a coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8). It is comprised so that.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a payout IC tag reader 501 is disposed on the side of the standby member 470 in a normal state (see FIGS. 4 and 5C). With the payout IC tag reader 501, as a special value from the privilege coin C positioned on the standby member 470, that is, from the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C to be paid out next time from the opening 54 (see FIG. 7). This coin information can be read by wireless communication using a transmission medium.

  Here, since the standby member 470 is disposed away from the storage member 460, the payout IC tag reader 501 is prevented from erroneously reading the coin information of the privilege coin C stored in the storage member 460. Can do.

  The main body 471 of the standby member 470 is made of a material that does not interfere with transmission of a transmission medium (such as radio waves or electromagnetic waves) used for reading information, such as resin, so that coin information can be read stably. It is preferable to comprise from the material.

  On the other hand, the storage member 460 is preferably made of a material that obstructs transmission of a transmission medium (such as radio waves and electromagnetic waves) used for reading coin information from the IC tag 602 (see FIG. 7), for example, a metal material.

  By configuring the storage member 460 from a material that obstructs transmission of a transmission medium used for reading coin information from the IC tag 602, the payout IC tag reader 501 stores the reward coin C stored in the storage member 460. Can be prevented from being read. As a result, the payout IC tag reader 501 can reliably read only the coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470.

  As described above, the privilege coin payout device 450 in the present embodiment supplies (discharges, transfers) a plurality of privilege coins C stored in the storage member 460 one by one to the standby member 470, and on the standby member 470. It is set as the structure which reads the coin information of the privilege coin C located.

  With this configuration, various types of privilege coins C can be stored in the storage member 460 regardless of the type of privilege coin C (that is, the content of the coin information that the privilege coin C has).

  Therefore, an administrator who manages the privilege coin C (for example, an administrator of a hall in which a gaming machine capable of paying out the privilege coin C such as the pachinko machine 10) additionally supplies the privilege coin C to the storage member 460. In doing so, the privilege coin C is not sorted according to its type (that is, the content of the coin information). Therefore, the management load of the manager who manages the privilege coin C is suppressed (reduced).

  In addition, since the standby member 470 is configured to wait for only one privilege coin C, the type of coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time from the opening 54 is recognized by reading by the payout IC tag reader 501. be able to. Therefore, when a suggestion condition to be described later is satisfied (satisfied), a variation display (dynamic display) and a stop display in a manner corresponding to the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to suggest (or notify) the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, an operation in which the above-described privilege coin payout device 450 pays out the privilege coin C from the opening 54 will be described. FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining the payout of the special coin C by the special coin payout device 450.

  When supplying one privilege coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470, first, the coin supply solenoid 464 (see FIG. 8) is turned on (excited), and the bottom member 462 is moved forward (in the direction of arrow F). Move.

  Here, when the bottom lid portion 462b of the bottom member 462 reaches a position where it is not supported by the upper end 465b of the support member 465, as shown in FIG. 6A, the bottom lid portion 462b of the bottom member 462 is rotated around the shaft 462c by its own weight. To open.

  Then, the one special coin C stored in the bottom member 462 slides in the direction of the arrow M1, and as a result, the special coin C is supplied to the main body 471 of the standby member 470. Thereby, one privilege coin C is put into a state of waiting for the payout from the opening 54 in the main body 471.

  Here, when the bottom member 462 moves forward (in the direction of arrow F), the support plate 462d is positioned below the peripheral wall member 461, and is supported in the internal space of the peripheral wall member 461 by the support plate 462d. The remaining privilege coin C is prevented from moving.

  When the bonus coin C is supplied to the main body 471 of the standby member 470, the coin supply solenoid 464 (see FIG. 8) is turned off, and the bottom member 462 is moved rearward (in the direction of arrow B). As a result, the storage member 460 returns to the normal state, and a new bonus coin C is accommodated in the bottom member 472 accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the bonus coin C is paid out through the opening 54, the coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8) is turned on (excited). When the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on, the main body 471 moves upward (in the direction of arrow U).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the inclined surface 471a of the main body portion 471 reaches the opening 54, the privilege coin C that has been waiting at the standby member 470 (main body portion 471) slides in the direction of the arrow M2. As a result, it is paid out through the opening 54. Thereafter, the coin payout solenoid 472 (see FIG. 8) is turned off, and the main body 471 is moved downward (in the direction of arrow D). As a result, the main body 471 returns to the normal state, and a new privilege coin C supplied from the storage member 460 can be received.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the privilege coin C used with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. Fig.7 (a) is a front view of the privilege coin C, FIG.7 (b) is sectional drawing in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire in Fig.7 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the privilege coin C is a medium configured in a coin shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a coin main body 601 formed of a non-metallic material such as a resin; An IC tag 602 embedded in the coin main body 601 is included.

  The IC tag 602 is a wireless tag mainly including a small IC (Integrated Circuit) chip (not shown) and a built-in antenna (not shown). Generally, an IC tag and an RFID tag (Radio Frequency) are used. Identification) tag or electronic tag.

  Note that the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C (coin body 601) of the present embodiment is configured as a passive IC tag that does not require a battery (battery). Note that an active type IC tag incorporating a battery may be employed as the IC tag 602.

  An IC chip (not shown) of the IC tag 602 includes a memory (for example, ROM, WOROM (Write Once ROM), etc.) that can store information in a nonvolatile manner and is not rewritable. Then, coin information as a special value is stored in the non-rewritable memory.

  Note that the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 of the privilege coin C used in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is five types of main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9). Among the (identification information), it is information indicating one main symbol, and the type of the privilege coin C is distinguished by the coin information.

  Here, the symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 of the privilege coin C can be recognized from the design of the surface of the coin main body 601. For example, as shown in FIG. 7A, information indicating an octopus symbol corresponding to “1” is stored in the privilege coin C in which an octopus symbol is designed on the surface of the coin body 601, and the player Can visually recognize the design of the surface of the coin main body 601 to know the type of reward coin C (contents of coin information).

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, by mounting | wearing the coin information reading device 300 with one privilege coin C, the pattern corresponding to the coin information memorize | stored in the mounted | worn privilege coin C, ie, The reach effect using any one of the five main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) can be displayed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 12), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 11) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a holding lamp 84, and various switches including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown). 208, a solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like are connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 on the condition that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the firing stop switch for stopping the firing is not operated. Then, the launch solenoid is excited, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a voice output in a voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and the display control device 114. The setting of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 performed etc. is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Here, the ROM 222 has a coin type table 222a that associates coin information with the type of coin (that is, symbol) indicated by the coin information. The coin information of the special coin C read by the payout IC tag reader 501 or the receiving unit IC tag reader 302 can identify the type of the special coin C by referring to the coin type table 222a.

  The RAM 223 includes a payout coin memory 223a, a receiving coin memory 223b, a complete removal counter 223c, a coin payout suggestion flag 223d, a coin payout confirmation flag 223e, a coin payout flag 223f, a coin supply flag 223g, and a receiving portion. And a coin flag 223h.

  The payout coin memory 223a is a memory for storing the type of the special coin C positioned on the standby member 470 (main body 471) in the special coin payout device 450, that is, the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time. Although details will be described later, when the suggestion condition is satisfied and the display for suggesting the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is performed on the third symbol display device 82, the privilege stored in the payout coin memory 223a. The display is set based on the type of coin C.

  The receiving part coin memory 223b is a memory for storing the type of the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving part 300a of the coin information reading device 300. Although details will be described later, in the case of performing a reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving unit 300a, the setting of the reach effect is made based on the type of the privilege coin C stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b. Is done.

  The complete miss counter 223c receives a variation pattern command corresponding to a complete miss from the main control device 110 in a state where the type of the bonus coin C to be paid out next time is not suggested (that is, the suggestion condition is not established). It is a counter for counting the number of times of continuous reception.

  The complete deviation counter 223c displays a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach fluctuation (reach fluctuation at normal or probability variation big hit, reach back / rear reach, reach other than front / rear out) when reception of a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to complete deviation is interrupted. When a command is received from main controller 110, it is cleared to zero. Further, the complete disconnection counter 223c is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can receive the special coins to be paid out next time when the complete miss counter 223c reaches 30, that is, when complete miss occurs continuously 30 times. The suggestion condition, which is a condition for starting the suggestion (or notification) of the type C, is established.

  The coin payout suggestion flag 223d is a flag indicating whether or not a suggestion condition that is a condition for starting suggestion of the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is established. If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on, it indicates that the suggestion condition is satisfied.

  The coin payout suggestion flag 223d is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is turned on when the suggestion condition is satisfied. The coin payout suggestion flag 223d that is turned on when the suggestion condition is satisfied is then turned off when the privilege coin C is paid out from the opening 54.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to complete deviation is received from the main controller 110 continuously 30 times, or regardless of reception of the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to complete deviation. When the privilege coin granting condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, when a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main control device 110), the suggesting condition is satisfied and the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on.

  The coin payout confirmation flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the payout of the privilege coin C is confirmed. If the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is on, it indicates that the payout of the special coin C has been confirmed because the grant condition for the special coin C has been established.

  This coin payout confirmation flag 223e is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and when the bonus coin C granting condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is issued). (When received from the main controller 110). The coin payout confirmation flag 223e that is turned on when the grant condition of the privilege coin C is satisfied is turned on when a stop command is received from the main controller 110 thereafter.

  The coin payout flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not to perform a payout operation of the privilege coin C. If the coin payout flag 223f is on, the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on (excited) in the coin payout processing (see FIG. 27) described later, and the special coin C is paid out from the standby member 470 of the special coin payout device 450. The action is taken out.

  The coin payout flag 223f is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is turned on when the bonus coin C is paid out. More specifically, it is turned on when a stop command is received from the main control device 110 after the payout of the privilege coin C is confirmed by receiving a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot from the main control device 110. The coin payout flag 223f that is turned on in this manner is turned off when the operation of paying out the privilege coin C from the standby member 470 is completed in a coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later.

  The coin supply flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not to perform a supply operation (transfer) of the privilege coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470. If the coin supply flag 223g is on, the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excited) in a coin payout process (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, and the privilege coin C is supplied from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470. Is done.

  This coin supply flag 223g is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is turned on when the payout of the special coin C is completed. Then, the coin supply flag 223g turned on in this way is turned off when the supply operation of the privilege coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470 is completed in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) described later.

  The receiving unit coin flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not to perform a reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving unit 300a of the coin information reading device 300. If the receiving unit coin flag 223h is on, the reach effect using the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving unit 300a is executed.

  This coin receiving part flag 223h is in a waiting state for the customer with the special coin C attached to the coin receiving part 300a (the effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time). When the coin effect button 301 is pressed, the state is reversed each time. Specifically, when the coin effect button 301 is pressed during the waiting for the customer effect with the privilege coin C being attached to the coin receiving unit 300a, it is turned on if the coin receiving unit flag 223h is off. On the other hand, if the coin receiving part flag 223h is on, it is turned off. The coin receiving part flag 223h is initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  In addition, the RAM 223 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not a variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When a command determination process (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is executed, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, the first stored command is read, and the read command is analyzed. The process according to the command is performed.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226 that outputs sound from a speaker (not shown), and a lamp display device 227 that performs lamp display using the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. The IC tag reader 501 for payout, the IC tag reader 302 for receiving part, the coin effect button 301, the coin supply solenoid 464 and the coin payout solenoid 472 in the privilege coin payout device 450 are connected.

  The display control device 114 controls the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs, and includes a variable time counter (not shown).

  Here, the variation time counter (not shown) is a counter that measures the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) since the variation effect was started when the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This variation time counter is reset to zero immediately before the variation effect is started in the variation effect process (see FIG. 33) executed every 20 milliseconds (see S1404 in FIG. 33), and the third symbol display device 81. While the changing effect is being performed, it is updated by adding 1 each time the changing effect process is executed (see S1408 in FIG. 33). That is, the variation time counter counts 20 milliseconds as one count. In the variation effect process, variation effect data or continuous notice effect data corresponding to the value of the variation time counter is read from the video RAM 234 described later, and an image corresponding to the effect data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the work RAM 233 has, as flags (not shown), an effect permission flag that indicates whether or not the effect is permitted, and a change start flag that indicates whether or not the change display should be started. The production permission flag is turned on when the production permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1205 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the power is cut off. (Not shown). The variation start flag is turned on when a variation pattern command for display instructing the mode of variation effect or continuous notice effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (S1206 in FIG. 31). When the variable display is started on the third symbol display device 81 (see S1403 in FIG. 33).

  The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores effect data (character information) such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format.

  The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing data for variation effect after decompression (hereinafter referred to as “variation effect data”) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At this time, the video RAM 234 stores the contents of the variation effect data in correspondence with the elapsed time from the start to the end of the variation. As a result, it is possible to extract the variation effect data corresponding to the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) since the variation effect was started. Note that the variation effect data for performing a new reach effect corresponding to the coin information of the privilege coin C is stored in the video RAM 234 together with other change effect data.

  The video RAM 234 is provided with a variable effect area (not shown). This region for variation effect (not shown) is a region for storing variation effect data of the variation effect (variation display) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 responds to the variation elapsed time from the variation effect data in the mode indicated in the display variation pattern command stored in the video RAM 234 in advance. The changed effect data is read out and stored in this changed effect area (see S1406 in FIG. 33). The variable effect data stored in the variable effect area is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1407 in FIG. 33). And the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is changed by rewriting the content of the area | region for fluctuation | variation effect according to fluctuation | variation elapsed time.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17), store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete it.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 12), or at an interval of 2 ms, an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Stored in the counter buffer.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Here, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed. And updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is “373, 727” There are 14 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit, and in this embodiment, one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value (that is, After reaching 4), it is configured to return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in In addition, the value of the random number that becomes a high probability state after the jackpot is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the jackpot is “0, 4”, and two types of hits are determined. The Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of a high probability state and a low probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to a deviation. Any one of the three display modes is selected.

  The high probability state refers to a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) means a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored.

  Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random number values from which the stop pattern is selected. This is based on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reservations), etc. This is to change the stop pattern selection ratio.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 10 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, making it difficult to select “rear out of front / rear out of reach” or “reach out of front / rear out of reach”. Further, if each random number value is not stored in the holding ball storage area in a low probability state, a disturbance corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. A table with a narrow numerical value range of 51 to 238 is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 9 to 50, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the reach occurs.

  Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 8) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process.

  For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the variable time, or on the contrary, the variable time is subtracted to shorten the variable display time, or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the variable time is selected. .

  As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables with different ranges of random values from which the production pattern is selected, and whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Depending on the low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored, the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting in the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols consisting of nine types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers “1” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment, The design of the shell). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols corresponding to the odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are arranged is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the jackpot, the variable display is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are aligned.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the main symbol and the sub symbol are scrolled from right to left (in the direction of the arrow X) with a periodicity for each symbol row (various display). Is done.

  In such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 10, on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the 3rd symbol is arranged in three stages of left / middle / right or top / middle / bottom for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Is displayed. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns.

  Here, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in any case during horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  In each game, when the variable display that scrolls horizontally is stopped, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is arranged on any active line, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot. . At this time, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 17. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

  First, referring to FIG. 11, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in this start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 123 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the main process executed after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side and the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 15) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of acquired balls to the payout control device 111 A prize ball command corresponding to is sent. Further, by this external output processing (S201), a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, or the ball , The ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, the jackpot process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the jackpot state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). It transmits to (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power supply interruption state, It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

  Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the fluctuation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

  As shown in FIG. 13, in this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls is greater than 0 (S303). If the number N of active balls is 0 (S303: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the number of the operation holding balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the operation holding ball number N is decremented by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the holding ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). Whether or not the stop symbol is set is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit, the symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit by the value of the first hit type counter C2 Or a symbol that is in a low probability state is determined. In this embodiment, a red LED is turned on when a high probability state is reached after a big hit, a green LED is turned on when a low probability state is reached, and a blue LED is turned on when it is out of place. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S309, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the stop command, whereby one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

  Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 13). In this variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401).

  Whether it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, “7,307” is a winning value among the values 0 to 699 of the first random number counter C1 when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is normal low probability, and “28, “63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618” are hit values.

  When it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode for the big hit is set (S402). ).

  In the process of S402, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, whether to shift to a high probability state after big hit (whether it is a probable big hit) or to shift to a low probability state (whether it is a normal big hit) is set. The When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the transition state after the jackpot.

  That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, when “1, 2, 3”, the state shifts to a low probability state (normally big hit), and when “0, 4”, , Move to a high probability state (probability big hit).

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to indicate whether the reach is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. .

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S403, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  After the process of S403 or S405, a variation pattern command is set (S406). In the process of S406, the fluctuation pattern command at the time of jackpot is the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determined in the process of S403 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 (that is, the normal jackpot or the probability variation jackpot. Or)). In the process of S406, the fluctuation pattern command at the time of deviation is the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determined in the process of S405 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (that is, the front / rear deviation reach or other than the front / rear deviation) It is set according to whether it is reach or completely off.

  After the process of S406, a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404 (S407), and then the process returns to the variation process.

  These fluctuation pattern commands and stop symbol commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are converted into voice lamps in the processing of S201 of the main processing (see FIG. 12). It is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When reaching 738, 4, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  After that, the start winning process (see FIG. 16) accompanying the winning to the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor and turns on / off the launch of the ball on the condition that the launch stop switch for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining OFF. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first entrance pass counter 203b (S602).

  After the process of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of actuated balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). If there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number N of activated balls is <4 (S603: Yes), the number N of activated balls is incremented by 1 (S604), and further updated in step S503. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S605).

  On the other hand, if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the number N of operation reservation balls is not less than 4 (S603: No). , S604 and S605 are skipped, the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms). Included.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and this start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S2115 (see FIG. 19) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 19, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2112 in FIG. 19), it executes a power-off process in S2115. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2115 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S2115 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004.

  On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2115, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S2005: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S2115, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2115 (see S2114 in FIG. 19). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2115 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2115 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  After the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S2010, the privilege coin payout device 450 is set (S2011), the interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Here, in the processing of S2011, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege coin C is located on the main body portion 471 of the standby member 470, and when the privilege coin C is not located on the main body portion 471 of the standby member 470. Turns on the coin supply solenoid 464 to supply the special coin C from the storage member 460 to the standby member 470, and ends the processing of S2011. On the other hand, when the privilege coin C is located on the main body 471 of the standby member 470, the processing of S2011 is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the main process executed after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed since the start of the main process (S2101), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), The processing proceeds to S2110 without performing the processing in S2102 to S2109.

  Here, in the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed, S2102 to S2109 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the updating process of each counter (see S2301 in FIG. 21) and the command determination process in S2111 in the decorative symbol variation display process in S2110 in a short cycle. By executing the command determination process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2107 described later ( After that, a power-on notification process is executed (S2103).

  The power-on notification process (S2103) is a notification for notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. The notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device. 227. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2104 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2104, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S2105). In the customer waiting effect, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen (demo screen) is performed when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, and the setting is a command To the display control device 114. In the hold number display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 85 according to the value of the hold number counter 223a is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2106). In this frame button input monitoring / production process (S2106), it is monitored whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production which can have, or selecting one reach production out of a plurality of reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S2106 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S2107), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2108). In the lamp editing process (S2107), lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process (S2108), the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. The

  After the process of S2108, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2107 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2108 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  The process of S2110 is a process of setting the effect form of the change effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81 and transmitting a command instructing the set aspect to the display control device 114. Details of the decorative symbol variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110), a coin payout process for paying out the special coin C from the special coin payout device 450 is executed (S2111). The detailed process of the coin payout process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S2111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2112). Details of this command determination processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the command determination process (S2112), it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2116). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2001, and the main process is repeatedly executed.

  If the RAM 223 is destroyed as a result of checking in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 19) described above.

  In this command determination process (S2112), first, a first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and analyzed. It is confirmed whether a variation pattern command has been received from the device 110 (S2201).

  As a result of confirmation in the processing of S2201, when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S2201: Yes), a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205).

  After the process of S2205, the fluctuation time is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2206). The variation time extracted by the processing of S2206 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is used when setting a variation effect mode in a decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 21) described later.

  After the processing of S2206, the display mode (usual big hit, probable big hit, front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / rear, complete out) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2207), and this command determination processing (S2112) is terminated. Return to processing. The display mode extracted by the processing of S2207 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is related to setting a mode of variation effect in the decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 21) described later, or to paying out the special coin C. Used when setting.

  On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2201, if the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2201: No), it is confirmed whether the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202). .

  If a stop symbol command is received from the main controller 110 as a result of checking in the process of S2202 (S2202: Yes), the stop symbol from the stop symbol command (normal jackpot, probability variation big hit, front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / back off, Any of complete deviation) is extracted (S2213), the command determination process (S2112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The stop symbol extracted by the process of S2213 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223, and is used when a stop symbol is set in a decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 21) described later.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol command has not been received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2202 (S2202: No), it is confirmed whether the stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2203).

  If the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S2208).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is ON, that is, whether or not the payout of the special coin C is confirmed by the establishment of the grant condition of the special coin C (S2209). That is, whether the stop command being processed is a stop command received after receiving a command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot (in this embodiment, a variation pattern command corresponding to a probability variation jackpot), which is a condition for granting the bonus coin C. Confirm.

  If the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is turned on as a result of checking in the processing of S2209 (S2209: Yes), the stop command being processed is a stop command received after receiving the command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot. The payout flag 223f is turned on (S2210).

  When the coin payout flag 223f is turned on by the process of S2210, the coin payout process (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is positioned on the standby member 470 of the bonus coin payout device 450 in synchronization with the stoppage display of the probability variation big hit. The reward coin C is paid out.

  After the processing of S2210, the coin payout determination flag 223e is turned off (S2211), the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned off (S2212), this command determination processing (S2112) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S2209, when the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is off, that is, when the granting condition of the privilege coin C is not established (S2209: No), the processing of S2210 to S2212 is skipped, This command determination process (S2112) ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  If the stop command is not received from the main controller 110 as a result of checking in the process of S2203 (S2203: No), other commands (that is, other than the fluctuation pattern command, the stop symbol command, or the stop symbol command) ) Is received, the process according to the received command is executed (S2204), the command determination process (S2112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  In the process of S2204, if the received other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, and the process result is stored in the RAM 233. Alternatively, if the received other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 19) described above.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110), first, various counters (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 (a counter for setting the effect mode of the variation effect, a counter for setting the stop symbol for the normal big hit) Then, the updating process of the counter for setting the stop symbol at the time of detachment is executed (S2301).

  After the processing of S2301, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2302). As a result of checking in the process of S2302, if the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S2302: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. The decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the change start flag (not shown) is turned on as a result of checking in the process of S2302, the change start flag is turned off (S2303), and the coin payout setting process is executed (S2304). ). Here, in the coin payout setting process (S2304), settings related to the payout of the special coin C are performed based on the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command in the process of S2212. Details of the coin payout setting process (S2304) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the coin payout setting process (S2304), the change time in the change effect extracted from the change pattern command in the process of S2206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2205).

  After the process of S2205, based on the change time acquired by the process of S2206 and the setting by the coin payout setting process (S2304), the mode of change display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The variation effect setting process is executed (S2306). The detailed processing of the variation effect setting processing (S2306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the variation effect setting process (S2306), a stop symbol setting process for setting a stop symbol displayed at the end of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is performed (S2307). The detailed process of the stop symbol setting process (S2307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the stop symbol setting process (S2307), a display variation pattern command for instructing the variation display effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting processing (S2306) is output to the display control device 114. (S2308).

  Next, a display stop symbol command for instructing a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is output to the display control device 114 (S2309). To return to the main process.

  The display control device 114 displays the display on the third symbol display device 81 (variation display and stop display) according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the sound lamp control device 113 in the processes of S2308 and S2309. Control.

  Next, the above-described coin payout setting process (S2304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a coin payout setting process (S2304) executed in the decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIG. 22, in this coin payout setting process (S2304), first, it is confirmed whether or not a command indicating a jackpot has been received (S2401). In the process of S2401, it is confirmed whether the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command by the process of S2207 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) indicates a big hit (normal jackpot or probable change jackpot) (S2401).

  As a result of checking in the process of S2401, as a result of the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command showing a big jackpot (normal jackpot, probable big jackpot) (S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to S2402.

  On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2401, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is a mode indicating out of place (rear out of front / rear, reach other than out of front / rear, complete out) (S2401: No), It is confirmed whether the reach is out of reach (S2406).

  If the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is determined to be out of reach (rear out of front / rear reach, reach other than out of front / rear) (S2406: Yes), the process proceeds to S2402.

  Therefore, in this coin payout setting process (S2304), if the variation pattern command indicates a display mode other than complete losing, the process of S2402 is executed. In the process of S2402, the complete deviation counter 223c is cleared to 0 (S2402).

  After the processing of S2402, it is confirmed whether the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command indicates a probable big hit (S2403), and if it is a probable big hit (S2403: Yes), the condition for granting the special coin C is satisfied. Therefore, the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is turned on (S2404).

  When the coin payout confirmation flag 223e is turned on by the processing of S2404, the privilege is displayed at the end of the variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received variation pattern command (that is, at the stop display). The privilege coin C waiting on the standby member 470 of the coin payout device 450 is paid out from the opening 54.

  After the process of S2404, the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on (S2405), and the coin payout setting process (S2304) is ended. When the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on by the processing of S2304, the change display (dynamic display) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 based on the received change pattern command is the reward coin to be paid out next time. This is performed in a manner of suggesting (or notifying) the type of C.

  On the other hand, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is not out of reach, i.e., complete out (S2406: Yes), the number of receptions of the variation pattern command indicating complete out is indicated as a result of the confirmation in S2406. A complete out-counting process for counting is executed (S2407), and the coin payout setting process (S2304) is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the complete out-counting process (S2407) described above will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the complete miss count process (S2407) executed in the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22).

  As shown in FIG. 23, in this complete out-counting process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2501). If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off as a result of the confirmation in S2501 (S2501: No), the third symbol display device 81 does not suggest the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time. Since the number of continuous receptions of the variation pattern command corresponding to complete deviation is being counted, in this case, the complete deviation counter 223c is incremented by 1 (S2502).

  After the processing of S2502, it is confirmed whether the value of the complete outage counter 223c is 3 or more (S2503). If the value of the complete outcounter 223c is 30 or more (the value of the complete outage counter 223c ≧ 30) (S2503: Yes) ) Since the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to complete losing has been received 30 times in succession, the suggestion condition, which is the condition for starting the suggestion of the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time, has been established, so the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is set. This is turned on (S2504), and this complete out-counting process (S2407) is terminated.

  Although details will be described later, when the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on by the processing of S2504, in the change effect setting process (see FIG. 24), the reach effect mode (the change mode) suggesting the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time. ) Can be set. Further, when the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on by the processing of S2504, the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 25) or the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 26). The suggested stop symbol can be set.

  Generally, since the player has a desire to generate a jackpot game, the change display (or stop display at the time of stoppage) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 shifts to the jackpot state. If it continues to be completely unrelated to the game, the player who sees it tends to gradually lose interest in the game.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the suggestion condition is satisfied and the coin payout suggestion is established when the variable display indicating complete detachment is continued a predetermined number of times (30 times in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. The flag 223d is turned on. As a result, it is possible to set a stop symbol that suggests the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time, so that the player can be expected to acquire the special coin C.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even in a gaming state where winning of a prize ball cannot be expected, expectation for another value (privilege coin C) can be expected. You can experience a new game that was not available in the game machines. Therefore, this new gameability becomes a new added value, and it is possible to maintain the interest of the game held by the player over a long period of time.

  As the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on by the processing of S2504, the change display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received change pattern command is the reward coin to be paid out next time. This is performed in a manner that suggests the type of C.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S2503, if the value of the complete detachment counter 223c is less than 30 (S2503: No), the establishment condition is not yet established, so the processing of S2504 is skipped and this complete detachment is performed. The count process (S2407) is terminated.

  If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S2501 (S2501: Yes), the suggestion condition has already been established, and the suggestion of the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time is indicated by the symbol display device. Since the process is performed at 81, the process of S2502 to S2504 is skipped, and the complete out-of-counting process (S2407) is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the above-described variation effect setting process (S2304) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a variation effect setting process (S2304) executed in the decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 20).

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the variation effect setting process (S2304), first, is the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command obtained by the process of S2207 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) indicating complete deviation? Is confirmed (S2601).

  If the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command indicates that the variation pattern command is completely out (S2601: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2601, the variation variation effect is produced as the variation effect rendering mode in the third symbol display device 81. A mode is set (S2606), and this variation effect setting process (S2306) is terminated. In the processing of S2606, one effect is generated based on the value of a counter (not shown) that sets the effect aspect of the change effect provided in the RAM 223 from the plurality of effect forms corresponding to the deviation change effect. Set the aspect.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2601, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command does not indicate complete losing, that is, the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot) or If it indicates an outreach (front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out) (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S2602.

  In S2602, it is confirmed whether the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command by the process of S2207 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) indicates a normal jackpot (S2602).

  As a result of checking in the process of S2602, if the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command does not normally indicate a big hit, that is, the received variation pattern command is a probability variation big hit or outreach (rear out of front / rear out reach, reach other than out of front / rear out). If it is shown (S2602: No), it is confirmed whether the receiving unit coin flag 223h is on (S2603). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the coin effect button 301 is operated in response to the player's desire to display the reach effect using the special coin C on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of checking in the processing of S2603, if the receiving unit coin flag 223h is on (S2603: Yes), it is desired to display a reach effect using the special coin C on the third symbol display device 81. In such a case, the reach effect mode is set based on the value stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b and the change time that defines the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.) (S2607). The setting process (S2306) ends.

  The reach production mode set by the processing of S2607 is stored in the value stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b, that is, in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300. It is the reach production aspect as a privilege including the pattern corresponding to the coin information.

  For example, when the value stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b (the value indicating the coin information of the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300) corresponds to the octopus symbol, this octopus symbol is displayed. A new reach production mode using is set as a reach production mode as a privilege.

  As an example of the reach effect mode set by the processing of S2607, the remaining one column is displayed in a state where symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two of the three columns. And a new reach production mode that is not normal, including a notice production in which the symbols pass as a group (as a so-called fish school). Further, with the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b being stopped and displayed in two of the three columns, the remaining one column fluctuates and the symbol is highlighted (enlarged display etc.) )) A new reach production mode that is not normally performed.

  As a result of the processing of S2607, the reach effect mode as a privilege according to the value stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the value stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223 b corresponds to the octopus symbol, a new reach effect mode using the octopus symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S2603, if the receiving unit coin flag 223h is off (S2603: No), it is checked whether the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2604). That is, it is confirmed whether or not a suggestion condition that is a condition for starting suggestion of the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time is satisfied.

  As a result of the confirmation in S2604, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is on (S2604; Yes), the suggestion condition is satisfied. In such a case, the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a, Based on the variation time that defines the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.), a reach production mode is set (S2605), and this variation production setting process (S2306) is terminated.

  The reach effect mode set by the processing of S2605 is the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a, that is, the IC tag 602 of the special coin C to be paid out next time, which is located on the standby member 470 in the special coin payout device 450. This is a new reach production mode including symbols corresponding to the coin information stored in. For example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223b corresponds to the octopus symbol, a new reach effect mode using this octopus symbol is set.

  In addition, as the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605, the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the payout coin memory 223a are in three columns, similarly to the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 described above. In a state where the display is stopped in two rows, the remaining one row fluctuates, and a new reach production mode that is not normal including a notice production in which the symbol passes as a group (as a so-called fish school), With the symbol corresponding to the value stored in the partial coin memory 223b being stopped and displayed in two of the three columns, the remaining one column changes and the symbol is highlighted (enlarged display or the like). A new reach production mode that is not normal is exemplified.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the suggestion condition being satisfied) and the process of S2607 are set. If the coin information of the target benefit coin C is the same as the reach effect mode (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300), the coin The same reach production mode using the pattern corresponding to the information is set. For example, in the state in which the reach effect modes set by the processing of S2605 and S2607 are both stopped and displayed in two of the three columns corresponding to the values stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b, the remaining 1 A reach effect mode including a notice effect that the symbols pass as a group is set as the column fluctuates.

  As a result of the processing of S2605, a new reach effect mode corresponding to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a corresponds to the octopus symbol, a new reach effect using the octopus symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is a value indicating the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time, a new reach effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of the processing of S2605. The mode is a variation mode (variation display mode) that suggests the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time.

  Here, as described above, as one of the requirements for satisfying the suggestion condition, there may be a case where the complete deviation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is continuously displayed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 30 times). is there. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied based on the fact that the complete detachment has continued, the fluctuation display for the probability variation big hit or detach reach (rear anteroposterior reach, reach other than anteroposterior detachment) is shown in FIG. When it is performed on the display device 81, the variable display is performed in a new reach production mode including a symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time.

  Therefore, after the suggestion condition is established, the appearance frequency of a new reach effect mode including a specific symbol corresponding to the privilege coin C to be paid out next time increases. As a result of an increase in the frequency of appearance of a special reach effect including a specific symbol, the player will recognize the special reach effect including the specific symbol as a significant reach effect and will be paid out the next time. It is possible to play a game while expecting to acquire the special coin C.

  At this time, the player can predict the type of the special coin C from a new reach production mode including a specific symbol that appears at a significant frequency. Therefore, when it is predicted that the type of privilege coin C desired to be acquired will be paid out next time, the player will further increase his expectation for acquisition.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is established, the third symbol display device 81 produces a new reach production mode, thereby coin information (as a special value) as a special value. It is possible to make the player have an expectation for the privilege coin C having the information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to provide more abundant changes (variations) in game play than conventional game machines, and as a result, interest in games is lost. It is difficult to maintain a long-term interest.

  On the other hand, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is OFF as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S2604 (S2604: No), the value of a counter (not shown) that sets the effect mode of the variation effect provided in the RAM223. And the reach production mode is set based on the fluctuation time that defines the type of reach (S2608), and this fluctuation production setting process (S2306) is terminated.

  If the display mode extracted from the variation pattern command indicates a normal jackpot as a result of the confirmation in S2602, the variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Since it stops at the main symbol corresponding to the even number, also in such a case, the process proceeds to S2608, and the value of the counter (not shown) for setting the effect mode of the variation effect provided in the RAM 223, The reach production mode is set based on the variation time that defines the type of reach.

  Next, the stop symbol setting process (S2307) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol setting process (S2307) executed in the decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 20).

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the stop symbol setting process (S2304), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) is a big hit (normal jackpot, probable big hit) Is confirmed (S2701).

  If the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a jackpot (S2701: Yes) as a result of checking in the process of S2701, it is confirmed whether it indicates a probable change jackpot (S2702).

  If the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a probable big hit (S2702: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2702, it is confirmed whether the receiving unit coin flag 223h is on (S2703). .

  As a result of checking in the processing of S2703, if the receiving unit coin flag 223h is on (S2703: Yes), it is desired to display the reach effect using the special coin C on the third symbol display device 81. In such a case, a stop symbol is set based on the value stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b (S2704), and the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is terminated.

  As a result of the processing of S2704, the symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300 (in this embodiment, an odd number) A stop symbol in which one of the corresponding five types of main symbols) is aligned is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variable display is stopped.

  On the other hand, if the receiving unit coin flag 223h is turned off as a result of the confirmation in S2703 (S2703: No), a stop symbol is set based on the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a (S2707). The stop symbol setting process (S2307) is terminated.

  As a result of the processing in S2707, the symbol corresponding to the coin information stored in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C to be paid out next time from the privilege coin payout device 450 (in this embodiment, an odd number) The stop symbol in which one of the five types of main symbols corresponding to the above is arranged is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variable display is stopped.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a probable jackpot but is a normal jackpot (S2702: No) as a result of checking in the process of S2702, the jackpot provided in the RAM 223 is displayed. A stop symbol is set based on the value of a counter (not shown) for setting the stop symbol at the time (S2706), and the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is terminated.

  Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2701, when the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a big hit, it indicates a disengagement (front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, complete disengagement) ( (S2701: No), the stop symbol setting process for setting the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is executed (S2705), and the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the above described stop stop symbol setting process (S2705) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the stoppage stop symbol setting process (S2705) executed in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 25).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the stop stop symbol setting process (S2705), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) It is confirmed whether or not it indicates reach other than front / rear deviation (S2801).

  As a result of checking in the process of S2801, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates an outreach (rearward / rearward reach, reach other than frontward / rearward) (S2801: Yes), a coin payout suggestion flag 223d is displayed. It is confirmed whether it is on (S2802).

  If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on as a result of checking in the process of S2802 (S2802: Yes), a stop symbol is set based on the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a (S2804).

  As a result of the processing of S2804 being performed, the outage stop symbol in the reach state (rear-front / rear-reach reach, non-rear-reach reach) waiting for the symbol corresponding to the coin information of the special coin C to be paid out next time from the special coin payout device 450, When the variable display is stopped, the display is stopped on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned off as a result of checking in the process of S2802 (S2802: No), in this case, a counter (not shown) for setting a stop symbol at the time of disengagement provided in the RAM 223. The stop symbol is set based on the value (S2803), and the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is terminated.

  If the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a missed reach, that is, if it indicates a complete miss (S2801: No), the coin payout suggestion flag is confirmed. If the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is off (S2805: No), a value of a counter (not shown) for setting a stop symbol at the time of disengagement provided in the RAM 223 is checked. The stop symbol is set based on (S2806), and the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the coin payout suggestion flag 223d is turned on as a result of checking in the processing of S2805 (S2806: No), the chance chance corresponding to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is set as a stop symbol (S2807). The stop symbol setting process (S2307) is terminated.

  Here, the chances set by the processing of S2807 are defined in advance for each type of privilege coin C (in this embodiment, five main symbols corresponding to odd numbers), and the chance corresponding to each type. Each eye is defined as an array of symbols including one symbol corresponding to each type. For example, when the type of privilege coin C is an octopus symbol (a symbol corresponding to “1”), “turtle (3) / shark (4) / octopus (1)” is defined as the corresponding chance item. Yes. Therefore, for example, when the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a corresponds to the octopus symbol, the chance chance corresponding to “turtle (3) / shark (4) / octopus (1)” is stopped. Set as a symbol.

  As a result of the processing of S2807, the specific chance according to the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the outlier variation effect (variation display) is stopped. . For example, if the value stored in the payout coin memory 223a corresponds to the octopus symbol, the chance of “Turtle (3) / Shark (4) / Octopus (1)” When stopped, the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is established, even if the off-change effect that does not expect any shift to the big hit state is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is off. When the variable production is stopped, a specific chance item (stop display) indicating the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time is displayed, so that the player who sees the specific chance will receive the special coin to be paid out next time. A game can be performed while expecting C.

  At this time, the player can predict the type of the special coin C from a specific chance suggesting the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time. Therefore, when it is predicted that the type of privilege coin C desired to be acquired will be paid out next time, the player will further increase his expectation for acquisition.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the suggestion condition is established, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to stop and display a specific chance eye that suggests the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time. Thus, the player can have an expectation for the privilege coin C having the coin information as the special value (information as the special value). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to provide more abundant changes (variations) in game play than conventional game machines, and as a result, interest in games is lost. It is difficult to maintain a long-term interest.

  Next, the coin payout process (S2111) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the coin payout process (S2111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 19) described above.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the coin payout process (S2111), it is first checked whether the coin payout flag 223f is on (S2901). If it is on (S2901: Yes), the coin payout solenoid 472 is on ( It is confirmed whether it is excited (S2902).

  If the coin payout solenoid 472 is not turned on (excited) as a result of checking in the process of S2902, the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on (excited) (S2903), and this coin payout process (S2903) is performed. finish. As a result of the processing of S2903, the standby member 470 (main body portion 471) that has been in a normal state moves upward to the position of the opening 54 (see FIG. 6B).

  On the other hand, if the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on (excited) as a result of checking in the process of S2902, it is checked whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the coin payout solenoid 472 was turned on (S2902: Yes) ( S2904). Note that the “predetermined time” in the confirmation processing in S2904 is a time sufficient for the bonus coin C on the standby member 470 (main body 471) to be paid out from the opening 54, and is defined to be, for example, about 3 seconds.

  If the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the coin payout solenoid 472 is turned on as a result of checking in the process of S2904 (S2902: No), this coin payout process (S2111) is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2904, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the coin payout solenoid 472 was turned on (S2902: Yes), the privilege coin C on the standby member 470 (main body 471) is opened 54. The coin payout solenoid 472 is turned off (S2905). As a result of the process of S2905, the standby member 470 (main body 471) that is in the normal state moves downward from the position of the opening 54 and returns to the normal state (see FIG. 6A).

  After the processing of S2905, the coin payout flag 223f is turned off (S2906), the coin supply flag 223g is turned on (S2907), and this coin payout processing (S2903) is ended. When the coin supply flag 223g is turned on by the processing of S2907, the privilege coin C stored in the storage member 460 is newly supplied (transferred) to the standby member 470.

  If the coin payout flag 223f is turned off as a result of the confirmation in S2901 (S2901: No), it is confirmed whether the coin supply flag 223g is turned on (S2908).

  If the coin supply flag 223g is turned off as a result of the confirmation in S2908 (S2908: No), it is confirmed whether the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excited) (S2909).

  If the coin supply solenoid 464 is not turned on (excited) as a result of the confirmation in S2909 (S2909: No), the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excited) (S2910), and this coin payout process ( S2903) is terminated. As a result of the processing of S2910, the bottom cover portion 462 of the storage member 460 that has been in a normal state moves forward (to the lower dish unit 15 side) with respect to the peripheral wall member 461 (see FIG. 6A).

  On the other hand, if the coin supply solenoid 464 is turned on (excited) as a result of the confirmation in S2909 (S2909: Yes), it is confirmed whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the coin supply solenoid 464 was turned on ( S2911). Note that the “predetermined time” in the confirmation processing in S2911 is a time sufficient for the privilege coin C stored in the bottom cover 462 to be supplied to the standby member 470, and is defined as, for example, about 3 seconds. .

  As a result of checking in the process of S2911, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the coin supply solenoid 464 was turned on (S2911: No), this coin payout process (S2903) is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S2911, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the coin supply solenoid 464 was turned on (S2911: Yes), a new privilege coin C is supplied to the standby member 470. The coin supply solenoid 464 is turned off (S2912), the coin supply flag 223g is turned off (S2913), and the coin payout process (S2903) is ended. Here, as a result of the process of S2912, the bottom cover 462 of the storage member 460 moves rearward with respect to the peripheral wall member 461 and returns to the normal state (see FIG. 6B).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This timer interruption process is executed every 2 ms by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the timer interruption process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, first, a payout coin detection process for reading the coin information of the special coin C located on the standby member 470 of the special coin payout apparatus 450 is executed (S3001). ). Details of the payout coin detection process (S3001) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the payout coin detection process (S3001) is executed, a receiving part coin detection process for reading the coin information of the privilege coin C attached to the coin receiving part 300a of the coin information reading device 300 is executed (S3002), and a timer interruption is performed. The process ends. Detailed processing of the receiving portion coin detection processing (S3002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the above-described payout coin detection process (S3001) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the payout coin detection process (S3001) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the payout coin detection process (S3001), first, coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 is read by the payout IC tag reader 501 (S3101).

  Next, based on the read coin information and the information stored in the coin type table 222a, the type of the special coin C located on the standby member 470, that is, the special coin C to be paid out next time is determined (S3102), A value indicating the determined coin type is stored in the payout coin memory 223a (S3103), and the payout coin detection process (S3001) is terminated.

  Next, the receiving coin detection process (S3002) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the receiving unit coin detection process (S3002) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the receiving part coin detection process (S3002), first, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege coin C is attached to the coin receiving part 300a of the coin information reading device 300 (S3201). Whether or not the special coin C is attached to the coin information reading device 300 (coin receiving unit 300a) is detected by a contact-type sensor (not shown) provided in the coin receiving unit 300a.

  As a result of checking in the process of S3201, when the special coin C is attached to the coin information reading device 300 (S3201: Yes), the special coin C attached to the coin receiving unit 300a of the coin information reading device 300 is received. Reading is performed by the department IC tag reader 302 (S3202).

  After the processing of S3202, the type of the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300 is determined based on the read coin information and information stored in the coin type table 222a (S3203), and the determined coin A value indicating the type is stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b (S3204).

  After the processing of S3204, it is confirmed whether or not a customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3205). The “customer waiting effect” is an effect that is neither a variable display nor a jackpot effect, and is displayed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, and is a display that is independent of the game state ( For example, it is an effect in which a title display, a demonstration display, and the like are performed.

  As a result of checking in the process of S3205, when the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3205: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the coin effect button 301 is pressed (S3206).

  As a result of checking in the processing of S3206, when the coin effect button 301 is pressed (S3206: Yes), it is confirmed whether the receiving unit coin flag 223h is on (S3207), and the receiving unit coin flag 223h is off. If there is (S3207: No), the receiving unit coin flag 223h is turned on (S3208), and the receiving unit coin detection process (S3002) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the receiving unit coin flag 223h is turned on as a result of checking in the processing of S3207 (S3207: No), the receiving unit coin flag 223h is turned off (S3208), and the receiving unit coin detection process (S3002) is ended. To do.

  In addition, as a result of checking in the process of S3205, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not a customer waiting effect but a variable display or a jackpot effect is displayed (S3205: No), or the process of S3206 As a result of the confirmation, if the coin effect button 301 is not pressed (S3206: No), the receiving coin detection process (S3002) is terminated without performing the processes of S3207 to S3209.

  Also, as a result of checking in the process of S3201, when the bonus coin C is not attached to the coin information reading device 300 (S3201: No), the receiving unit coin flag 223h is turned off (S3208), and the receiving unit The coin detection process (S3002) is terminated.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state where the privilege coin C is attached to the coin information reading device 300, when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Each time the coin effect button 301 is operated, the value of the receiving unit coin flag 223h is reversed.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power-on and external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received.

  First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This external interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the external interrupt process is executed in accordance with the reception of the command from the sound lamp control device 113, the received command is determined in S1201, S1202, and S1203. Specifically, in S1201, it is confirmed whether the received command is an effect command (S1201). At this time, if the received command is an effect permission command (S1201: Yes), an effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1202), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not an effect command (S1201: No), it is confirmed whether the received command is a display variation pattern command (S1202). At this time, if the received command is a display variation pattern command (S1202: Yes), a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1206), and the display variation pattern command includes it. The variation mode (reach effect mode, outlier variation mode) is extracted (S1207), and the external interrupt process is terminated. Note that the variation mode extracted by the process of S1206 is stored in a predetermined area in the work RAM 233 and is referred to in a variation effect process (see FIG. 33) described later.

  If the received command is not a display variation pattern command (S1202: No), it is confirmed whether the received command is a display stop symbol command (S1203). At this time, if the received command is a display stop symbol command (S1203: Yes), the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is set (S1208), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  Finally, if the received command is not a display stop symbol command (S1203: No), that is, if the received command is not any of the production permission command, display variation pattern command, or display stop symbol command. Executes processing corresponding to the other received command (S1204), and ends the external interrupt processing. For example, if the received command is a stop command, a process for stopping the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, main processing executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  The main process shown in FIG. 32 is a process that is started when the power is turned on. When the main process is started, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed.

  After executing the initial setting process (S1301), the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read (S1302), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 (S1303). . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234 is different from the area in the video RAM 234 that stores the character information decompressed in the processing of S1303. The extracted character information is written in the area (S1304).

  After the process of S1304, it is confirmed whether an effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1305). As a result of checking in the processing of S1305, if the effect permission flag is OFF (S1305: No), the effect permission command has not been received from the main control device 110, and in this case, the effect permission command is received. Until the production permission flag is turned on, the processing after S1306 is waited.

  As a result of checking in the process of S1305, if the effect permission flag is turned on (S1305: Yes), the character information extracted in the process of S1304 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And it transfers to the process after S1306.

  In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit (S1306). If it is not a big hit (S1306: No), the third symbol display device 81 The variation effect process for displaying the variation effect is executed (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. Note that the detailed processing of the variation effect processing (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the result of the confirmation in S1306 is that the jackpot is being hit (S1306: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1309). In the jackpot effect process, the number of rounds, the number of prize balls are updated, images of backgrounds that are different for each round, etc. (new extraction of character information from the video RAM 234 and video RAM 234 of extracted character information) Write). After the big hit effect process (S1309) ends, the process proceeds to the process of S1308.

  In S1308, whether or not 20 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the process of S1306 in order to execute the process (S1306, S1307, S1309) for producing effects in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 milliseconds (20 ms). (S1308).

  As a result of checking in the process of S1308, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed (S1308: No), the process waits until 20 ms or more has elapsed, while if 20 ms or more has elapsed (S1308: Yes). The process proceeds to S1306. The processes from S1306 to S1309 are repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  Next, the above-described variation effect process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variation effect process (S1307) executed in the main process (see FIG. 32).

  As shown in FIG. 33, in this variation display process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the display executed on the third symbol display device 81 is varying (S1401), and if not varying (S1401: No). Then, it is confirmed whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is on (S1402).

  As a result of checking in the processing of S1402, if the fluctuation start flag is on (S1402: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1403), and a fluctuation time counter for counting the fluctuation time provided in the work RAM 233 (FIG. (Not shown) is reset to 0 (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1405.

  On the other hand, if the result of the confirmation in S1401 shows that the change is in progress (S1401: Yes), the change time counter (not shown) is updated (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1405. The fluctuation time counter is updated by reading the value of the fluctuation time counter, adding 1 to the value, and writing the added value back to the fluctuation time counter.

  In S1405, it is checked whether or not a stop command has been received from the main control device 110, and it is determined whether or not it is within the changing performance time (S1405). At this time, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received and it is within the variation production time (S1405: Yes), it is extracted from the display variation pattern command in S1207 of the external interrupt process (see FIG. 31). From the variation effect data corresponding to the variation mode, the variation effect data corresponding to the variation elapsed time indicated by the variation time counter (the elapsed time since the variation effect was started) is read from the video RAM 234, and the variation effect area of the video RAM 234 is read. (S1406). Next, an image corresponding to the variation effect data stored in the region for variation effect is displayed on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 (S1407), and this variation effect process (S1307) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has been received as a result of the process of S1405 and the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation has exceeded the fluctuation effect time (S1405: No), in S1208 of the external interrupt process (see FIG. 31). With the set stop symbol, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped (S1411), and the variation effect process is terminated.

  Further, if the change start flag is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1402 (S1402: No), other display processes, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player after a predetermined time has elapsed. A display such as a customer waiting effect displayed is executed (S1409), and this variation effect process (S1307) is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 130 receives a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot from the main control device 110, the grant condition is established, and the prize ball (game) The reward coin C having coin information having a special value different from (value) is paid out (granted).

  The special coin C is attached to the coin information reading device 300 according to the coin information of the special coin C attached (that is, according to the value stored in the receiving portion coin memory 223b). A new reach production mode as a privilege can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, the player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can have a high interest in the game by the new gameability that can be experienced using the special coin C, and such new gameability. As a new added value, the player's interest in games can be maintained for a long time. In addition, the player's interest will be directed toward the acquisition of bonus coins C that can experience a new gameability. In this respect, the gameability is improved and the player has a game. Can maintain their interest for a long time.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state satisfies a predetermined suggestion condition, the type of coin information held by the special coin C to be paid out next time (that is, the special coin C type). Is suggested (or notified) by the contents of the variable display or the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, when a certain gaming state (a gaming state satisfying the suggestion state), the type of bonus coins to be paid out next time is suggested by the contents of the variable display or the stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The player can continue the game with a sense of expectation that the bonus coin C may be acquired before the bonus coin C is acquired.

  In particular, when the type of privilege coin C given next time suggested by the display content (variable display or stop display) of the third symbol display device 81 is what the player himself is eager to acquire, The player can continue playing while waiting for the privilege coin C to be acquired.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of the privilege coin C to be given next time is suggested (or notified) by the display content of the third symbol display device 81, so that the conventional general gaming machine You can experience a new game that was not available. Therefore, this new gameability becomes a new added value, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long time.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied, the privilege coin C in which the coin information as the special value is stored in the IC tag 602 embedded therein is paid out. The second embodiment is configured such that a privilege card CA having a special value is discharged when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 34 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10A according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 34, an opening 1054 for paying out a privilege card CA (see FIG. 38) to be described later is formed on the left side of the lower plate 50 in the pachinko machine 10A. A privilege card discharge device 1450 (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is provided on the back side of the lower dish unit 15 as a device for discharging the privilege card CA from the opening 1054.

  A card information reader 1300 (see FIG. 35) is formed on the left side of the lower plate 50 and the opening 1054 so as to protrude forward. This card information reading device 1300 is a box-shaped body having an upper surface opened, from which the player inserts the acquired privilege card CA in the vertical direction (long axis direction) as necessary. It is configured to be able to.

  Although details will be described later, the card information reading device 1300 has a receiving unit card reader 1303 (see FIG. 35), and the privilege card CA inserted into the card information reading device 1300 is attached to the mounting solenoid 1304 (see FIG. 35). ), The card information recorded in the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) in the privilege card CA can be optically read.

  A read button 1301 is provided on the front surface (surface on the front view side) of the card information reader 1300. This read button 1301 is used when the player desires to produce an effect (in this embodiment, a jackpot effect or a reach effect) as a privilege using the privilege card CA inserted into the card information reading device 1300, or This is a button that can be operated by the player when the appearance of the effect as the privilege is not required in the state where the effect as the privilege appears.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the card information reading apparatus 1300 described above will be described more specifically. FIG. 35A is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure when the card information reader 1300 is viewed from the upper surface side, and FIG. 35B is a view of the card information reader 1300 viewed from the side surface side. FIG. 35C is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a case where the privilege card CA is attached to the card information reading device 1300. FIG. For the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the invention, FIGS. 35A to 35C are cross-sectional views including the mounting solenoid 1304.

  As shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, the card information reading device 1300 is attached to the end of the movable core of the housing 1302, the receiving portion card reader 1303, the mounting solenoid 1304, and the mounting solenoid 1304. It has a plate member 1305 and a reading button 1301.

  As shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, the housing 1302 includes a holder part 1302a whose upper surface is opened so that the privilege card CA can be inserted in the vertical direction (long axis direction), and a front side from the holder part 1302a. (On the front view side of the pachinko machine 10A) has a chamber 1302b in which the card reader 1303 for receiving part is accommodated.

  A rectangular transparent portion 1302c having a size corresponding to the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA is formed on a wall that partitions the holder portion 1302a and the chamber 1302b in the housing 1302. More specifically, the rectangular transparent portion 1302c is formed at a height corresponding to the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA when the privilege card CA is attached (FIG. 35 (c)).

  Therefore, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA can be viewed from the room 1302b side through the transparent portion 1302c. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA is configured as a transparent (light transmissive) area, and the card information area 1602 includes the contents of the privilege. A code pattern (card information) is formed. Therefore, the receiving unit card reader 1303 accommodated in the chamber 1302b reads the code pattern transmitted through the transparent portion 1302c.

  The receiving unit card reader 1303 is a code reader using a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensor. A code reader using a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor may be used instead of the CMOS image sensor.

  The receiving unit card reader 1303 converts an image of a subject that passes through the transparent portion 1302 c (in this embodiment, a code pattern that passes through the transparent portion 1302 c) into an electrical signal and inputs the electrical signal to the audio lamp control device 113.

  The mounting solenoid 1304 is provided at a position where the plate member 1305 attached to the tip of the movable iron core and the transparent portion 1302c have the same height. Further, the plate member 1305 has a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the transparent portion 1302c, and the surface on the side in contact with the privilege card CA is configured to be white and non-ground.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), the holder portion 1302a is inserted even when the maximum number of privilege cards CA that can be used at one time (in the present embodiment, 5) is inserted together. It is configured to have a sufficient depth (projection length from the lower dish unit) so that it can be easily performed.

  However, the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) is provided because the privilege card CA is easily placed in the holder portion 1302a by providing sufficient depth, while the privilege card CA inserted in the holder portion 1302a is not orderly. ) Does not match the transparent portion 1302c, and the code pattern cannot be read by the receiving portion card reader 1303.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the read button 1301 is pressed by the player, the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (excited), and the privilege card CA is pressed to the transparent portion 1302c side by the plate member 1305, thereby As shown in FIG. 35 (c), the privilege cards CA inserted in the holder portion 1302a are aligned, and the code pattern (card information of one or more privilege cards CA) can be read by the card reader 1303 for receiving portion. I have to.

  When the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on and the privilege card CA in the holder portion 1302a is aligned, the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA is the same height as the transparent portion 1302c (that is, card information). The plate member 1305 positioned at the same height as the region 1602 is pressed against the transparent portion 1302c while being entirely covered.

  When pressed by the mounting solenoid 1304 and the plate member 1305, the plate member 1305 covers the card information area 1602, so that the receiving unit card reader 1303 can read the code pattern with the white non-ground surface of the plate member 1305 as a background. The code pattern (card information) formed in the transparent card information area 1602 in the card CA can be reliably read.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the privilege card discharge apparatus 1450 which is the discharge device of the privilege card CA will be described. FIG. 36 (a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the internal structure when the privilege card discharge device 1450 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 36 (b) shows the privilege card discharge device 1450 from the discharge port 1451a side. FIG. 36C is a top view schematically showing the internal structure when the privilege card discharge device 1450 is viewed from the upper surface side. For the purpose of facilitating understanding of the invention, in FIG. 36A, a space is provided between adjacent privilege cards CA. In FIG. 36C, some configurations such as the privilege card CA and the upper lid member 1452 are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 36A to 36C, the privilege card discharge device 1450 includes a storage member 1451 capable of storing a plurality of privilege cards CA, an upper lid member 1452, and a discharge card reader 1453. Configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36C, the storage member 1451 is a box-shaped body that is open and has an upper surface that can be accommodated (stored) by stacking (superimposing) privilege cards CA in the internal space. It is. As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, the storage member 1451 has a storage member 1451 on the front surface (surface on the lower plate unit 15 side) at a position corresponding to the opening 1054 provided in the lower plate unit 15. Among the privilege cards CA stored in 1451, an outlet 1451a for discharging one privilege card CA located on the bottom side is provided.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and (c), the bottom surface of the storage member 1451 has a rectangular shape having a size corresponding to the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) of the privilege card CA at a substantially central portion. A transparent portion 1451b having a shape is formed. As shown in FIGS. 36A and 36C, a transfer motor 1451c, which is a stepping motor, is attached to the discharge port 1451a side of the bottom surface of the storage member 1451.

  The upper lid member 1452 is configured to be removable, and can be removed when necessary, for example, when the privilege card CA is replenished in the internal space of the storage member 1451. The upper lid member 1452 is provided with a biasing member 1455 that biases the stacked privilege cards CA from above in order to stabilize the discharge of the privilege cards CA.

  The biasing member 1455 includes a spring member 1455a whose one end is connected to the upper lid member 1452, and a flat plate member 1455b connected to the other end of the spring member 1455a. In the present embodiment, the urging member 1455 is disposed such that the plate member 1455b is positioned above the transparent portion 1451b (FIG. 36C) of the storage member 1451. Further, the plate member 1455b is a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the transparent portion 1451b, and the surface on the side in contact with the privilege card CA is configured to be white and non-ground.

  The discharge card reader 1453 is a code reader using a CMOS image sensor, like the receiving unit card reader 1303 described above. As shown in FIGS. 35A and 35C, the ejection card reader 1453 is positioned below the transparent portion 1451b of the storage member 1451, converts an image of a subject seen from the transparent portion 1451b into an electrical signal, and outputs audio. Input to the lamp control device 113.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, one privilege card CA located on the bottom surface side of the storage member 1451, that is, the privilege card CA that is discharged (given) next time from the opening 1054 is stored in the storage member 1451. Is configured to be transferred by the transfer motor 1451c from the initial position of the privilege card CA until the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) is located on the transparent portion 1451b. The image of the card information area 1602 that can be seen from the unit 1451b is read. That is, the discharge card reader 1453 is for reading the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA discharged from the opening 1054 next time.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the operation | movement which the privilege card discharge apparatus 1450 mentioned above discharges | emits privilege card CA from the opening 1054 is demonstrated. FIG. 37 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining a privilege card CA discharging operation by the privilege card discharging device 1450.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a diagram showing a state where all of the privilege cards CA stored in the privilege card discharge device 1450 (storage member 1451) are located at the initial position. When discharging one privilege card CA, the transfer motor 1451c is driven (rotated) in the direction of the arrow R, and one privilege card CA located on the bottom surface side of the storage member 1451 is removed from the lower plate unit 15. It is transferred in the direction toward the opening 1054 (arrow M direction).

  In this embodiment, all the privilege cards CA are card information areas 1602 (see FIG. 38) so that the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) can be obtained by the ejection card reader 1453 after being transferred in the direction of arrow M by the transfer motor 1451c. 1602 is stored in the storage member 1451 while being positioned on the opposite side (position P) to the discharge port 1451a.

  FIG. 37B is a diagram showing a state where one privilege card CA located on the bottom surface side of the storage member 1451 is located at the confirmation position. This “confirmation position” is the position of the privilege card CA where the card information area 1602 (see FIG. 38) in the privilege card CA is located on the transparent portion 1451b. The privilege card CA located on the bottom surface side of the storage member 1451 is transferred in the M direction from the initial position by the transfer motor 1451c, and is temporarily stopped at the confirmation position. As shown in FIG. 37 (b), at the confirmation position, the privilege card CA is not exposed to the outside through the opening 1504 and cannot be taken out by the player.

  Although details will be described later, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA is a transparent (light-transmitting) region, and a code pattern (in the card information region 1602) indicating the content of the privilege that the privilege card CA has ( Card information) is formed. In the present embodiment, the code pattern in the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is read by the discharge card reader 1453, and is discharged next time according to the content of the read code pattern (card information). The grant condition (card discharge condition) for the privilege card CA (that is, the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position) is changed.

  In the privilege card discharging apparatus 1450 of the present embodiment, the distance L from the initial position to the confirmation position is the transfer direction M1 in the card information area 1602 that is the light transmissive area of the privilege card CA (ie, from the initial position to the confirmation position). Direction) and the transfer direction M1 of the region closer to the confirmation position than the card information region 1602 in the main body 1601 which is an opaque region (light-impermeable region) of the privilege card CA. It is configured to be shorter than the length La (see FIG. 38).

  By defining the relationship between L, La, and Lb as described above, the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position (that is, one privilege card CA to be discharged next time) is the privilege card CA. This is read by the discharge card reader 1453 with the opaque region of the background as the background. Here, when one side of the privilege card CA is set to be a white plain, and the white plain is directed to the bottom side of the privilege card discharge device 1450 so as to face the discharge card reader 1453, the card with the white plain is used as a background. The code pattern in the information area 1602 can be read, and the code pattern (card information) can be read reliably.

  In the privilege card discharging apparatus 1450 of the present embodiment, the distance Lx from the transfer limit position of the privilege card CA by the transfer motor 1451c to the opening end on the front side of the opening 1054 (side facing the player) is the privilege card. It is configured to be shorter than the CA discharge direction length Lc (see FIG. 38). Therefore, at least the privilege card CA in the transfer limit position by the transfer motor 1451c is exposed to the outside from the opening 1054. Therefore, the privilege card CA can be positioned at a position where the player can take out (that is, a position exposed to the outside) only by the transfer by the transfer motor 1451c.

  Further, since a part of the privilege card CA is used as a background when the card information area 1602 is read, the distance between the initial position and the confirmation position in the privilege card discharge device 1450 can be suppressed to a relatively short distance. As a result, the privilege card discharge device 1450 can be configured to save space.

  As described above, the plate member 1455b of the biasing member 1455 for biasing the privilege card CA stored in the privilege card discharge device 1450 (storage member 1451) is a substantially rectangular shape slightly larger than the transparent portion 1451b. Since the surface on the side in contact with the privilege card CA is configured as a white solid surface, even when the last privilege card CA stored in the storage member 1451 is one, the background of the card information area 1602 is not white. The card information included in the card information area 1602 can be suitably read.

  In the present embodiment, since the transparent portion 1451b is provided in a size corresponding to the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA, the next time without reading the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA located at the initial position. Only the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be discharged can be read.

  FIG. 37 (c) is a diagram showing a state where one privilege card CA located on the bottom surface side of the storage member 1451 is located at the discharge position. This “discharge position” is a position where a part of the privilege card CA is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054 and can be taken out by the player. When the condition (granting condition) for granting the privilege card CA to the player is established, the privilege card CA stopped at the confirmation position is moved from the confirmation position to the discharge position by driving the transfer motor 1451c (arrow R direction). It is transferred to and stopped.

  Then, when the privilege card CA is taken out by the player and the card is completely discharged, the state returns to the state of FIG. 37A again. At that time, the privilege card CA of one privilege card CA located on the bottom surface side of the storage member 1451 is returned. Ejection begins.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, a presence / absence detection sensor which is a reflective photoelectric sensor disposed between the outlet 1451a of the privilege card discharging apparatus 1450 and the opening 1054. 1461 is provided, and it is determined that the card has been completely discharged when the privilege card CA located at the discharge position is removed by the player and the presence / absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off.

  As described above, in the privilege card discharge device 1450 of the present embodiment, the distance Lx from the transfer limit position of the privilege card CA by the transfer motor 1451c to the opening end on the front side of the opening 1054 is the discharge direction length Lc of the privilege card CA. (Refer to FIG. 38). Therefore, the privilege card CA can be stopped at a position where a part of the privilege card CA is exposed to the outside through the opening 1054 (that is, the discharge position) only by driving the transfer motor 1451c, and can be taken out by the player.

  On the other hand, when the privilege card CA is completely discharged from the opening 1054 without a player's hand, a card transfer stepping motor other than the transfer motor 1451c is provided between the discharge port 1451a and the opening 1054. However, according to the privilege card discharge device 1450 of the present embodiment, the privilege card CA can be transferred from the initial position to the discharge position with only one transfer motor 1451c. Since the discharge can be completed, the privilege card discharge device 1450 can be configured compactly, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the privilege card CA used with the pachinko machine 10A of this embodiment is demonstrated concretely. 38 (a) is a front view of the privilege card CA, FIG. 38 (b) is a back view of the privilege card CA, and FIG. 38 (c) is taken along the line X8c-X8c in FIG. 38 (a). It is sectional drawing.

  As shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C, the privilege card CA is a medium configured in a rectangular card shape (thin plate shape), and a main body portion 1601 made of an opaque (light-impermeable) resin. And a card information area 1602 made of a transparent (light transmissive) resin.

  The card information area 1602 has a code pattern indicating card information formed therein. In this embodiment, the code information (card information) is formed by dividing the inside of the card information area 1602 into sections of 4 rows × 4 columns and filling the sections according to the contents of the privilege.

  On the surface 1601a of the main body 1601, a design 1601a1 (FIG. 38 (a)) corresponding to the content of the code pattern as the card information included in the card information area 1602 (that is, the content of the privilege that the privilege card CA has). In the example, Miss Marin-chan) is written.

  Further, on the surface 1601a, a mark 1601a2 indicating a privilege content classification is written. In the present embodiment, “gold card”, “silver card”, and “copper card” are set as the privilege content categories. In the example of FIG. 38A, the privilege card CA is “gold card”. The letter “Gold” which means On the other hand, the back surface 1601b of the main body 1601 is white and non-ground.

  Here, as described above, the length La in the transfer direction M of the main body 1601 located on the confirmation position side of the card information area 1602 in the privilege card discharge device 1450 and the length Lb in the transfer direction M in the card information area 1602. Is designed so that Lb <L <La with respect to the distance L (see FIG. 36) from the initial position to the confirmation position in the privilege card discharge device 1450.

  Therefore, since the back surface 1601b of the main body 1601 is a white solid surface, the card information by the card reader 1453 for discharge is arranged by arranging the white plain back surface 1601b toward the bottom surface side of the privilege card discharge device 1450. When the area 1602 is read, the background of the card information area 1602 can be white, and the card information included in the card information area 1602 can be preferably read.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), in the privilege card CA, the card information area 1602 is formed to be deflected to the peripheral side of the privilege card CA. It is possible to take a wide impermeable area. Therefore, when the card information area 1602 is read by the discharge card reader 1453, when the back surface 1601b of the main body 1601 is used, the privilege card CA adjacent in the privilege card discharge device 1450 (that is, the privilege card to be discharged next time). CA and card information area 1602 of privilege card CA using back surface 1601b as a background can be prevented from overlapping, and the code pattern (card information) of privilege card CA to be discharged next time is erroneously detected. Can be prevented.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the code pattern (card information) formed in the card information area 1602 will be described. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram for explaining a code pattern formed in the card information area 1602. Note that all of the card information areas 1602 shown in FIGS. 39A to 39D are viewed from the front surface 1601a of the privilege card CA.

  FIG. 39A is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents indicated by each section in the section of 4 rows × 4 columns formed in the card information area 1602. In FIG. 39 (a), the numbers “1” to “9” are assigned to the nine sections constituting the area 1602c in order to clarify the invention.

  Of the 4 rows × 4 columns section formed in the card information area 1602, the section 1602a of (row, column) = (1, 4) is a code pattern indicating that the privilege card CA is a “gold card” It is. The section 1602b of (row, column) = (2, 4) is a code pattern indicating that the privilege card CA is a “silver card”.

  Also, (row, column) = (1,1), (1,2), (1,3), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (3,1), An area 1602c including nine sections (3, 2) and (3, 3) is a code pattern indicating that the privilege card CA is a “copper card”. In the present embodiment, nine types of copper cards corresponding to nine types of main symbols are set, and each type is associated with one of the nine sections constituting the area 1602c.

  For example, when (row, column) = (1, 1) is associated with the main symbol (octopus) for “1” and this area 1602c1 (see FIG. 39C) is filled. Indicates that the privilege card CA is a card corresponding to the main symbol for “1” among the “copper cards”. Similarly, (row, column) = (1,2), (1,3), (2,1), (2,2), (2,3), (3,1), (3,2), (3, 3) are associated with the main symbols for “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”, “9”, respectively. .

  Further, a section 1602d of (row, column) = (4, 1) is an area 1602d for defining the direction (back and front) of the privilege card CA, and this area 1602d is common to all the privilege cards CA. Filled.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment is configured so as to obtain one type of privilege for one privilege card CA, the 11 sections constituting the region 1602a, the region 1602b, and the region 1602c Of these, only one section is filled.

  For example, FIG. 39B is a schematic diagram showing a card information area 1602 in a privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. When the privilege card CA is a “gold card”, an area 1602a corresponding to the “gold card” is filled, and an area 1602d common to all the privilege cards CA is filled.

  FIG. 39C is a schematic diagram showing a card information area 1602 in the privilege card CA which is a “silver card”. When the privilege card CA is a “silver card”, an area 1602b corresponding to the “silver card” is filled, and an area 1602d common to all the privilege cards CA is filled.

  FIG. 39D is a schematic diagram showing a card information area 1602 in the privilege card CA that is a “copper card” corresponding to the main symbol for “1”. When the privilege card CA is a card corresponding to the main symbol corresponding to “1” in the “copper card”, it corresponds to the main symbol corresponding to “1” in the area 1602c consisting of nine sections corresponding to the “copper card”. The area 1602c1 to be painted is filled, and the area 1602d common to all the privilege cards CA is filled.

  FIG. 39 (e) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a card information area 1602 in a state where a plurality of privilege cards CA are correctly stacked. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, a plurality of privilege cards CA acquired by the player can be mounted on the card information reading device 1300 in a stacked manner. As will be described in detail later, when a plurality of privilege cards CA are attached to the card information reading device 1300, as a result of reading by the receiving unit card reader 1302, an effect as a privilege is attached to each privilege card CA. Only the number of privilege cards CA is displayed.

  Since the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA is configured to be light-transmitting, when a plurality of privilege cards are stacked, a new code pattern is configured by the sections filled in each privilege card CA. Is done.

  Here, the example shown in FIG. 39 (e) is a card information area 1602 when three privilege cards CA each having the privilege card area 1602 shown in FIGS. 39 (b) to 39 (d) are overlapped. . Therefore, the area 1602a derived from the “gold card”, the area 1602b derived from the “silver card”, the area 1602c1 derived from the “copper card” corresponding to the main symbol for “1”, and all the privilege cards CA A code pattern is composed of the region 1602d formed in common.

  When the code pattern of the privilege card area 1602 shown in FIG. 39E (a new code pattern formed by overlapping three privilege cards CA) is read by the receiving unit card reader 1302, When the area 1602a is filled, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the privilege card CA of the “gold card” is included in the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300. can do.

  Similarly, the area 1602b and the area 1602c1 are filled, so that the MPU 221 corresponds to the main symbols for “silver card” and “1” in the privilege card CA mounted on the card information reading device 1300. It can be determined that the privilege card CA “copper card” is included.

  On the other hand, the area 1602d is derived from all the privilege cards CA. Here, if there is even one privilege card CA mounted on the card information reading device 1300 with the front and back sides reversed, the area E of (row, column) = (4, 4) is filled. Become. Therefore, when the area E is included in the code pattern read by the receiving unit card reader 1302, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the presence of the privilege card CA that is erroneously installed in the opposite direction. can do.

  As described above, since the area 1602d for defining the direction (front and back) of the privilege card CA is formed in common for all the privilege cards CA, the card information reader 1300 is provided with respect to the receiving unit card reader 1302. The surface to be directed can be clearly defined, and it is possible to prevent erroneous detection caused by directing the opposite surface and the occurrence of a result different from the result that should originally appear (malfunction).

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A in the second embodiment, and FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10A in the second embodiment. is there. The main difference between the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8) is the configuration of the sound lamp control device 113. .

  First, as shown in FIG. 40, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 mounted on the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment shows the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA and the card information. It has a card type table 222b that associates card types (that is, privilege contents). The code pattern (card information) of the privilege card CA read by the discharge card reader 1453 or the receiving unit card reader 1303 refers to the card type table 222b, and the type of the privilege card CA (contents of the privilege) ) Can be identified.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment includes a discharge card memory 223j, a card discharge confirmation flag 223k, a card discharge flag 223l, a card removal waiting flag 223m, and a card transfer flag. 223n, card reading flag 223o, card mounting flag 223p, gold card flag 223q, silver card flag 223r, copper card flag 223s, odd copper card flag area 223t, even copper card flag area 223u, And a jackpot counter 223v.

  The discharge card memory 223j is a memory for storing the type of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position (see FIG. 37 (b)) in the privilege card discharge device 1450, that is, the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. is there. Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10A according to the present embodiment provides the player with the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position based on the type of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j. The condition (granting condition) is changed.

  The card discharge confirmation flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the discharge of the privilege card CA is confirmed. If this card discharge confirmation flag 223k is on, it indicates that the privilege card CA has been discharged because the grant condition of the privilege card CA is satisfied.

  This card discharge confirmation flag 223k is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the privilege card CA grant condition is satisfied. The card discharge confirmation flag 223k that is turned on when the privilege card CA grant condition is satisfied is turned off as the privilege card CA starts being discharged.

  The card discharge flag 223l is a flag indicating whether or not the privilege card CA is transferred from the confirmed position to the discharge position. If this card payout flag 223l is on, the transfer motor 1451c is driven in a card discharge process (see FIG. 49) described later, and the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is transferred to the discharge position. Is done.

  The card discharge flag 223l is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the privilege card CA is started to be discharged. The card discharge flag 223l thus turned on is turned off when the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the discharge position in the card discharge processing (see FIG. 49).

  The card removal waiting flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the discharge of the privilege card CA has been completed, that is, whether or not the privilege card CA located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 has been extracted by the player. If this card removal waiting flag 223m is on, it indicates that the player has not yet removed the privilege card CA located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450.

  This card removal waiting flag 223m is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is located at the discharge position. The card removal waiting flag 223m that is turned on in such a manner is turned off when the presence / absence detection sensor 1461 is turned off from turning on and the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed.

  The card transfer flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the confirmation position among the privilege cards CA located at the initial position in the privilege card discharge device 1450. If the card transfer flag 223n is on, the transfer motor 1451c is driven in the card discharge process described later (see FIG. 49), and the privilege card CA located at the initial position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is transferred to the confirmation position. Is done.

  The card transfer flag 223n is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the privilege card CA is completely discharged. Then, the card transfer flag 223n turned on in this way is turned off when the privilege card CA located at the discharge position is taken out by the player in the card discharge processing (see FIG. 49) described later and the discharge of the privilege card CA is completed. Is done.

  The card reading flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not to read the card information (the code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position in the privilege card discharge device 1450. If the card reading flag 223o is on, the card information is read by the discharging card reader 1453.

  This card reading flag 223o is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and is turned on when the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is located at the confirmation position. Then, the card reading flag 223o turned on in this way is turned off when the card information is read by the discharging card reader 1453 for the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position.

  The card attachment flag 223p indicates whether or not the privilege card CA is attached to the holder portion 1302a of the card information reading apparatus 1300, that is, the privilege card CA that is inserted into the holder portion 1302a when the attachment solenoid 1304 is turned on (excited). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in a state that has been set. If the card attachment flag 223p is on, the privilege cards CA inserted in the holder portion 1302a are in an aligned state, and the card information included in the card information area 1602 can be read by the receiving portion card reader 1303. It shows that there is.

  This card mounting flag 223p is displayed in the state where the read button 1301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect (effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10A is not played by the player for a predetermined time). Is configured to do. That is, it is turned off if the card mounting flag 223p is on, and is turned off if the card mounting flag 223p is on. The card attachment flag 223p is initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on.

  The gold card flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not the card information read by the reception unit card reader 1303 includes card information derived from the privilege card CA which is a “gold card”. If 223q is on, it indicates that the card information derived from the privilege card CA which is the “gold card” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303.

  The silver card flag 223r is a flag indicating whether the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes card information derived from the privilege card CA which is a “silver card”. This silver card flag If 223r is on, it indicates that the card information derived from the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303.

  The copper card flag 223 s is a flag indicating whether or not the card information read by the reception unit card reader 1303 includes card information derived from the privilege card CA which is a “copper card”. The copper card flag If 223s is ON, it indicates that the card information derived from the privilege card CA which is a “copper card” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303.

  The gold card flag 223q, the silver card flag 223r, and the copper card flag 223s are initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, and the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 is used. On the basis of this, it is turned on when the corresponding card is included. On the other hand, these flags 223q, 223r, and 223s are turned off when the read button 1301 is pressed during the customer waiting effect and the card attachment flag 223p is turned off.

  The odd copper card flag area 223t is an area for storing the presence / absence of a copper card corresponding to a high probability symbol (main symbol corresponding to an odd number) when the copper card flag 223s is ON.

  This odd copper card flag area 223t includes five flags: a number 1 flag 223t1, a number 3 flag 223t2, a number 5 flag 223t3, a number 7 flag 223t4, and a number 9 flag 223t5. These flags 223t1 to 223t5 are respectively , “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”, the presence / absence of five types of copper cards corresponding to the main symbols. For example, if the number 5 flag 223t3 is on, it indicates that the card information derived from the “copper card” corresponding to the main symbol for “5” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. .

  The even copper card flag area 223u is an area for storing the presence / absence of a copper card corresponding to a low probability symbol (main symbol corresponding to an even number) when the copper card flag 223s is ON.

  The even copper card flag area 223u includes four flags: a number 2 flag 223u1, a number 4 flag 223u2, a number 6 flag 223u3, and a number 8 flag 223u4. These flags 223u1 to 223u4 are respectively “2”, The presence or absence of four types of copper cards corresponding to the main symbols for “4”, “6”, and “8” is shown. For example, if the number 2 flag 223u1 is ON, it indicates that the card information derived from the “copper card” corresponding to the main symbol for “2” is included in the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. .

  The flags 223t1 to 223t5 and 223u1 to 223u4 included in the odd copper card flag area 223t and the even copper card flag area 223u are initialized (off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on. Each time the card information is read by the card reader 1303, based on the read card information, if the corresponding card is included, it is turned on, and if not, it is turned off.

  The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is a counter for counting the number of times that the probability variation jackpot occurs after the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the confirmation position in the privilege card discharge device 1450.

  The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is incremented by one every time a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (in this embodiment, a stop symbol command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot) is received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, each time the privilege card CA is taken out by the player (that is, every time the privilege card CA is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position), it is cleared to zero. The probability variation big hit counter 223v is also cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10A is turned on.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when this probability variation jackpot counter 223v reaches the number of times set based on the type of privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j, The grant condition is established, and the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is transferred to the discharge position.

  In addition, the RAM 223 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not a variable display should be started. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When a command determination process (see FIG. 44) described later is executed, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, the first stored command is read, and the read command is analyzed. The process according to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a discharge card reader 1453, a transfer motor 1451c, a presence / absence detection sensor 1461, and a receiving unit. A card reader 1302, a mounting solenoid 1304, a reading button 1301, and the like are connected to each other.

  The display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10A according to the second embodiment is basically the same as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, but the video RAM 234 in the pachinko machine 10A according to the second embodiment includes the pachinko machine 10A. Dedicated variable effect data for performing an effect (in this embodiment, a reach effect or a jackpot effect) corresponding to the card information of the privilege card CA is stored together with other variable effect data.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42 to FIG. 54, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The start-up process of the second embodiment is that the process of S2011 for setting the privilege coin payout device 450 in the start-up process of the first embodiment is changed to a process for setting the privilege card discharge device 1450 (S2013). This is different from the startup processing (see FIG. 18) of the first embodiment described above.

  In the process of S2013, it is confirmed whether or not the privilege card CA is located at the confirmation position in the privilege card discharge device 1450. If the privilege card CA is not located, the transfer motor 1451c is driven to be located at the initial position. The privilege card CA to be transferred is transferred to the confirmation position. On the other hand, when the privilege card CA is located at the confirmation position, the process of S2013 is terminated as it is, and the process of S2012 is executed.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a main process executed after the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 43, when the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond (1 ms) or more has elapsed since the main process was started (S2101), and 1 ms or more must have elapsed. If (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2109.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S2101, if 1 ms or more has passed since the start of the main processing (S2101: Yes), the processing of S2102 to S2109 is executed as in the first embodiment described above, and the processing of S2103 Transition to processing.

  In the processing of S2113, display setting processing is executed (S2113). This display setting process (S2113) sets the effect mode of the variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81 and the jackpot effect as in the decorative symbol variation display process (S2110) of the first embodiment. This is a process of transmitting a command for instructing the set variation effect mode and jackpot effect mode to the display control device 114 after setting the mode. Details of the display setting process (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the execution of the display setting process (S2113), the grant condition establishment confirmation process for confirming the establishment of the grant condition for the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position in the privilege card discharge device 1450 (that is, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time). Is executed (S2114). Details of the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2114), a card discharge process for discharging the privilege card CA from the privilege card discharge device 1450 is executed (S2115). The detailed process of the card ejection process (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the card ejection process (S2115) is executed, a command determination process is executed (S2116). This command determination process (S2116) is a process according to the command received from the main controller 110, similarly to the command determination process (S2116) of the first embodiment. Details of the command determination process (S2116) of the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the command determination process (S2116), the processes of S2113 to S2117 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. That is, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 223 (S2113). If the power-off occurrence information is stored (S2113: Yes), the processing of S2115 to S2117 is executed. Thereafter, the process loops infinitely.

  As a result of checking in the process of S2113, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114), and if the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S2113). (S2114: No), the process returns to S2001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2113 (S2114: Yes), the process loops infinitely.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the command determination processing (S2116) of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S2116) of the second embodiment.

  In the command determination process (S2116) of the second embodiment, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. Then, it is confirmed whether a variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2201).

  If a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 as a result of the confirmation in S2201 (S2201: Yes), a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), and the variation pattern The fluctuation time is extracted from the command (S2206), the command determination process (S2112) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2201, if the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110 (S2201: No), it is confirmed whether the stop symbol command is received from the main control device 110 (S2202). .

  If the stop symbol command is received from the main controller 110 as a result of the confirmation in S2202 (S2202: Yes), the command determination process is executed after executing the processes in S2205 to S2213 as in the first embodiment. End (S2116) and return to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol command has not been received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2202 (S2202: No), it is confirmed whether the stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2203).

  If the stop command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the confirmation in S2203 (S2203: Yes), the received stop command is output to the display control device 114 (S2208).

  Next, it is confirmed whether the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is on, that is, whether or not the discharge of the privilege card CA is confirmed by the establishment of the condition for granting the privilege card CA (S2214).

  If the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on as a result of checking in the processing of S2214 (S2214: Yes), the stop command being processed is a stop command received immediately after the grant condition of the privilege card CA is established, so the card The discharge flag 223l is turned on (S2215).

  When the card discharge flag 223l is turned on by the process of S2215, in the card discharge process (see FIG. 49) described later, the privilege card is discharged in synchronization with the corresponding stop display (in this embodiment, the stop display for the probability variation big hit). Discharge of the privilege card CA from the device 1450 (transfer from the confirmation position to the discharge position) is started. After the processing of S2215, the card ejection confirmation flag 223l is turned off (S2216), this command determination processing (S2116) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the processing of S2214, if the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is off, that is, if the grant condition of the privilege card CA is not established (S2214: No), the processing of S2215 and S2216 is skipped, This command determination process (S2116) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  If the stop command has not been received from the main control device 110 as a result of checking in the processing of S2203 (S2203: No), the processing of S2204 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and this command The determination process (S2116) ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, the display setting process (S2113) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the display setting process (S2113) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in this display setting process (S2113), first, update processing of various counters is executed as in the first embodiment (S2301), and a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is displayed. Is determined to be on (S2302).

  As a result of checking in the process of S2302, if the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S2302: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this The display setting process (S2113) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the variation start flag (not shown) is on (S2302: Yes) as a result of checking in the processing of S2302, the variation start flag is turned off (S2303), and the command determination processing (see FIG. 44) is performed. The variation time in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2206 is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2205).

  After the process of S2205, based on the change time acquired by the process of S2206, a change effect setting process for setting the aspect of the change display (dynamic display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2310). The detailed process of the variation effect setting process (S2310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the variation effect setting process (S2310), a stop symbol setting process for setting a stop symbol displayed at the end of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is performed (S2311). Specifically, information on stop symbols (probability big hit, normal big hit, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, etc.) extracted from the stop symbol command in the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) The stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect, based on the value of the counter for setting the stop symbol at the jackpot provided in the RAM 223, the value of the counter for selecting the stop symbol at the time of losing Set.

  After the process of S2311, the jackpot effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2312). Details of this jackpot effect setting process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the jackpot effect setting process (S2312), a display variation pattern command is output to the display control device 114 to instruct the variation display effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation effect setting process (S2310). (S2308).

  Next, a display stop symbol command for instructing a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the stop symbol setting process (S2307) is output to the display control device 114 (S2309).

  After the processing of S2309, the jackpot effect command for instructing the effect mode of the jackpot effect set by the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) is output to the display control device 114 (S2313), and this display setting process (S2113) is ended. Return to the main process.

  The display control device 114 displays the display on the third symbol display device 81 (variation display and stop display) according to the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command output from the sound lamp control device 113 in the processes of S2308 and S2309. Control.

  In addition, the display control device 114 controls the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the jackpot effect command output from the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S2312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the above-described variation effect setting process (S2310) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the variable effect setting process (S2310) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 45).

  As shown in FIG. 46, in the variation effect setting process (S2310), first, is the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command obtained by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) indicating complete detachment? Is confirmed (S2621).

  If the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates complete detachment as a result of checking in the processing of S2621 (S2621: Yes), the variation variation effect is produced as the variation effect effect mode in the third symbol display device 81. An aspect is set (S2625), and this variation production setting process (S2310) is complete | finished. In the process of S2625, one effect is generated based on the value of a counter (not shown) that sets the effect mode of the variation effect provided in the RAM 223 from the plurality of effect modes corresponding to the deviation variation effect. Set the aspect.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking by the processing of S2621, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate complete losing, that is, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a big hit (usually big hit, probable big hit) or If it indicates an outreach (front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out) (S2621: No), the process proceeds to S2622.

  In S2622, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) indicates a big hit (usually big win, probability variation big hit) (S2622).

  If the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a big hit (S2622: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in S2622, the copper card flag 223s is turned on, that is, the receiving unit card reader. It is checked whether the card information read in 1303 includes a privilege card CA that is a “copper card” (S2623).

  If the copper card flag 223s is turned off as a result of the confirmation in S2623, that is, if the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 does not include the privilege card CA that is a “copper card” ( (S2623: No), the process proceeds to S2624.

  If the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a jackpot as a result of checking in the processing of S2622, that is, the received stop symbol command indicates an outreach (rear out-of-front reach, reach out of front / rear out). (S2622: No), the process proceeds to S2624.

  In the process of S2624, the reach effect mode is based on the value of a counter (not shown) that sets the effect mode of the change effect provided in the RAM 223 and the change time that defines the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc.). Is set (S2624). Then, after the process of S2624, this variation effect setting process (S2310) is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a result of the confirmation in S2623, when the copper card flag 223s is on, that is, when the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the privilege card CA that is a “copper card”. (S2623: Yes), it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a probable big hit (S2626).

  If the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is a probable big hit (S2626: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in S2626, the flag 223t1 to 223t5 included in the odd copper card flag area 223t is turned on. It is confirmed whether there is a flag (S2627).

  If the flag 223t1 to 223t5 included in the odd copper card flag area 223t is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2627 (S2627: Yes), it is included in the odd copper card flag area 223t. Based on the value of each flag 223t1 to 223t5 and the variation time that defines the type of reach, a reach effect mode is set (S2628), and this variation effect setting process (S2310) is terminated.

  As described above, the copper card flag 223s desires the player to display the reach effect as a privilege using the copper card (privilege card CA) on the third symbol display device 81, and displays the copper information on the card information reading device 1300. It is turned on when a privilege card CA as a card is inserted and a read button 1301 is operated. Therefore, the reach production mode set by the process of S2628 is a reach production mode as a privilege by the privilege card CA.

  Here, in the present embodiment, for example, when only the number 1 flag 223t1 is on among the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd copper card flag area 223t, the main symbol for “1” A new reach production mode using (octopus) is set as a reach production mode as a privilege.

  Alternatively, when two of the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd copper card flag area 223t are turned on, the numbers 1 flag 223t1 and the number 7 flag 223t4 are set to “1” and “7”. A new reach production mode using two corresponding main symbols (octopus and dugong) is set as a reach production mode as a privilege.

  As yet another example, when all five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd copper card flag area 223t are on, 5 corresponding to the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9). A new reach production mode using two main symbols (octopus, turtle, shrimp, dugong, crab) is set as the reach production mode as a privilege.

  In the present embodiment, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on among the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd-numbered copper card flag area 223t is a reach effect mode set by the processing of S2628. While the other columns are stopped and displayed in two of the three columns, the remaining one column fluctuates and the symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 5 types of symbols depending on the number of flags that are turned on) An unusual new reach production mode including a notice production that passes through as a school (as a so-called fish school) is set.

  Of the five flags (flags 223t1 to 223t5) included in the odd copper card flag area 223t, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag being turned on is stopped and displayed in two of the three columns. The symbol corresponding to the flag that is turned on (1 to 5 types of symbols depending on the number of flags that are turned on) is highlighted (enlarged display etc.). It may be a reach production mode.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command is not a probable big hit, that is, a normal big hit (S2626: No) as a result of the confirmation in S2626, it is included in the even copper card flag area 223u. It is checked whether any of the flags 223u1 to 223u4 that are turned on is on (S2629).

  If the flag 223u1 to 223u4 included in the even copper card flag area 223u is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2629 (S2629: Yes), it is included in the even copper card flag area 223u. The reach effect mode is set based on the value of each of the flags 223u1 to 223u4 and the change time that defines the type of reach (S2630), and the change effect setting process (S2310) is terminated. The reach effect mode set by the process of S2630 is also the reach effect mode as a privilege by the privilege card CA, similarly to the reach effect mode set by the process of S2628.

  Here, in this embodiment, for example, when only the number 4 flag 223u2 is on among the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even copper card flag area 223u, the main symbol for “4” A new reach production mode using (shark) is set as a reach production mode as a privilege.

  Alternatively, when three of the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even copper card flag area 223u, that is, the number 2 flag 223u2, the number 6 flag 223u3, and the number 8 flag 223u4 are ON, “2 A new reach production mode using three main symbols (Harisenbon, Angkou, Angelfish) corresponding to “6” and “8” is set as a reach production mode as a privilege.

  In the present embodiment, one of the symbols corresponding to the flag that is turned on among the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even copper card flag area 223u is set as the reach effect mode set by the processing of S2630. While the remaining one column changes in the state of being stopped and displayed in two of the three columns, the symbols corresponding to the flags that are turned on (1 to 4 types of symbols depending on the number of flags that are turned on) An unusual new reach production mode including a notice production that passes through as a school (as a so-called fish school) is set.

  Of the four flags (flags 223u1 to 223u4) included in the even copper card flag area 223u, one of the symbols corresponding to the turned on flag is stopped and displayed in two of the three columns. The symbol corresponding to the flag that is turned on (1 to 4 types of symbols depending on the number of flags that are turned on) is highlighted (enlarged display etc.). It may be a reach production mode.

  In addition, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2627, when there is no flag turned on in the flags 223t1 to 223t5 included in the odd copper card flag area 223t (S2627: No), or the process is confirmed by the process of S2629. As a result, when there is no flag turned on in the flags 223u1 to 223u4 included in the even copper card flag area 223u (S2629: No), the counter (set in the RAM 223 effect setting mode) A reach production mode is set based on the value (not shown) and the fluctuation time that defines the type of reach (S2631), and the fluctuation production setting process (S2310) is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the above-described jackpot effect setting process (S2312) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) executed in the display setting process (see FIG. 45).

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the jackpot effect process (S2312), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) is a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot). It is confirmed whether it is what is shown (S4001).

  As a result of checking in the process of S4001, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a jackpot (S4001: No), the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a jackpot (S4001: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4001, the gold card flag 223q is turned on, that is, the card reader for receiving unit. It is confirmed whether the card information read in 1303 includes a privilege card CA that is a “gold card” (S4002).

  If the gold card flag is turned on as a result of checking in the process of S4002 (S4002: Yes), then, whether the silver card flag 223r is turned on, that is, the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 is “ It is confirmed whether not only the “gold card” but also the privilege card CA which is a “silver card” is included (S4003).

  If the silver card flag 223r is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S4003 (S4003: Yes), the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the privilege card CA, which is a “gold card”, and the “silver card”. Since both a certain privilege card CA are included, “gold and silver jackpot effect” which is a jackpot effect defined in advance for the two-card set of “gold card” and “silver card” is set (S4004). ), The jackpot effect setting process (S2312) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the silver card flag 223r is turned off as a result of the confirmation in S4003 (S4003: No), the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. However, since the privilege card CA which is a “silver card” is not included, the “gold jackpot effect” which is a pre-determined jackpot effect is set for the “gold card” (S4008). The effect setting process (S2312) ends.

  If the gold card flag 223q is turned off as a result of the confirmation in S4002 (S4002: No), the silver card flag 223r is turned on, that is, the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes “ It is confirmed whether or not a privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is included (S4005).

  If the silver card flag 223r is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S4005 (S4005: Yes), the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 does not include the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. Since the privilege card CA, which is a “silver card”, is included, a “big jackpot effect” that is a pre-determined jackpot effect is set for the “silver card” (S4006), and this jackpot effect setting process (S2312) is ended.

  On the other hand, if the silver card flag 223q is turned off as a result of checking in the process of S4005 (S4005: No), the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 includes the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” as “silver”. Since the privilege card CA that is “card” is not included, a normal jackpot effect is set (S4007), and the jackpot effect setting process (S2312) is terminated.

  As described above, the gold card flag 223q indicates that the player wants to display the jackpot effect as a privilege using the gold card (privilege card CA) on the third symbol display device 81, and the card information reading device 1300 receives the gold It is turned on when a privilege card CA as a card is inserted and a read button 1301 is operated.

  Similarly, the silver card flag 223r desires the player to display the jackpot effect as a privilege using the silver card (privilege card CA) on the third symbol display device 81, and the card information reader 1300 displays the silver card. Is turned on when the privilege card CA is inserted and the read button 1301 is operated.

  Therefore, each jackpot effect mode set by the processing of S4004, S4006, or S4008 due to the gold card or silver card privilege card CA being attached to the card information reading device 1300 is a privilege by the privilege card CA. Is a big hit production mode.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot effect mode as a privilege for the gold card and the silver card is generated in a normal game that does not use the privilege card CA. Production).

  In this way, the game performance of the game using the privilege card CA is improved by making the jackpot effect mode as a privilege for the gold card and the silver card an effect that is difficult to appear in a normal game that does not use the privilege card CA. be able to. Moreover, since the player's willingness to acquire the privilege card CA can be increased, the player's interest in the game can be maintained over a long period of time.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a gold card and a silver card are compared, an effect that is harder to appear in a normal game is set as a jackpot effect mode as a privilege for the gold card, Has a higher value than silver cards. Thus, by giving superiority or inferiority to the value of the privilege card CA, the player expects to acquire the privilege card CA having higher value, and the interest in the game increases.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a gold card and a silver card are simultaneously mounted on the card information reading device 1300, a special jackpot prescribed in advance for a set of two of the gold card and the silver card. An effect (gold and silver jackpot effect) is set. In the present embodiment, such a jackpot effect (gold and silver jackpot effect) is a dedicated effect that cannot appear in a normal game that does not use the privilege card CA.

  Thus, by providing an effect that appears for the first time by combining a plurality of privilege cards CA (in this embodiment, two sets of gold cards and silver cards), it is possible to acquire a plurality of privilege cards CA. Value can be added. Therefore, since the player can have a sense of expectation for the acquisition of a large number of privilege cards CA, the player's interest in the game can be maintained over a long period of time.

  Note that the jackpot mode that appears when a gold card or silver card is attached to the card information reader 1300 alone is not an effect that appears in a normal game that does not use the privilege card CA. It may be a special effect that cannot be shown in normal games that are not used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the above-described provision condition establishment confirmation processing (S2114) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2114), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process of S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) indicates a probable big hit. (S4101).

  If the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a probable big hit (S4101: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4101, the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2114) is terminated and the process returns to the main process. .

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates the probability variation jackpot (S4101: Yes), the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is incremented by 1 (S4102) and the discharge card is checked. The value stored in the memory 223j, that is, the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is read (S4103).

  After the processing of S4103, it is confirmed whether or not the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4104).

  As a result of checking in the process of S4104, if it is a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4104: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. The processing of S4105 is executed to confirm whether or not the granted condition is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, since the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is 10 occurrences of probability variation jackpots, it is confirmed in the process of S4105 whether the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 10 or more. (S4105).

  If the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 10 or more as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4105 (S4105: Yes), the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is satisfied because the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “money card” is satisfied. Is turned on (S4106), and the provision condition confirmation process (S2114) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is less than 10 as a result of the confirmation in S4105 (S4105: No), the granting condition for the privilege card CA, which is a “money card”, is not satisfied. Is skipped, and this grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2114) is terminated.

  In addition, as a result of checking in the process of S4104, if the value of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “gold card” (S4104: Yes), the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is It is confirmed whether or not the value of the privilege card CA to be ejected is a “silver card” (S4107).

  As a result of checking in the process of S4107, if the value of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4107: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card”. The processing of S4108 is executed to confirm whether or not the given granting condition is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, since the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is the occurrence of five probability variation jackpots, it is confirmed in the process of S4108 whether the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is five or more. (S4108).

  If the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is equal to or greater than 5 as a result of the confirmation in S4108 (S4108: Yes), the grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is satisfied, and therefore the card discharge confirmation flag 223k. Is turned on (S4106), and the provision condition confirmation process (S2114) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is less than 5 as a result of the confirmation in S4108 (S4108: No), the granting condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is not established, so the processing in S4106 Is skipped, and this grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2114) is terminated.

  Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4107, when the benefit card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4107: Yes), the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is “copper”. Card ".

  Here, in this embodiment, since the granting condition for the privilege card CA that is a “copper card” is assumed to be one probability variation jackpot, the stop symbol command received from the main control device 110 this time is the probability variation jackpot. The granting condition is satisfied because it corresponds. Therefore, as a result of checking in the process of S4107, when the value of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating “silver card” (S4107: Yes), the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4109). ), The grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2114) is terminated.

  As a result of the card discharge confirmation flag 223k being turned on by the processing of S4106 or S4109, the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is transferred to the discharge position, and the privilege card CA is discharged. Is called.

  According to the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2114), the number of chances of winning the probability change is changed according to the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time, thereby changing the difficulty of establishment of the grant condition. Therefore, the difference in the card information (the content of the privilege) can be captured depending on whether the player feels that it is easy or difficult to acquire the privilege card CA. Can give an intonation.

  Also, generally, the privilege card CA that is more difficult to establish the granting condition and harder for the player to acquire is recognized as being more valuable and valuable. Even if there is a situation where it is difficult for the player to acquire the privilege card CA due to the change to the grant condition with a relatively high difficulty level, the player is difficult to acquire, but the amount of rarity is high and valuable. You can continue playing while waiting for high special value.

  Next, the card discharge process (S2115) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the card ejection process (S2115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) described above.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the card ejection process (S2115), first, it is confirmed whether the card ejection flag 223l is on (S4201). If the card ejection flag 223l is on (S4201: Yes), the transfer motor It is confirmed whether 1451c is driving (S4202).

  If the transfer motor 1451c is not being driven as a result of checking in the process of S4202 (S4202: No), the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is started (S4203), this card discharge process (S2115) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. . As a result of the process of S4203, transfer of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time from the confirmation position to the discharge position is started.

  On the other hand, if the transfer motor 1451c is being driven as a result of checking in the process of S4202 (S4202: Yes), it is checked whether the transfer motor 1451c has been driven by a predetermined amount for transferring the privilege card CA from the check position to the discharge position. (S4208).

  If the transfer motor 1451c is driven by a predetermined amount as a result of checking in the process of S4208 (S4208: Yes), since the privilege card CA has reached the discharge position, the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is stopped (S4209). The card discharge flag 223l is turned off (S4210), the card removal waiting flag 223m is turned on (S4211), and the card is discharged while waiting for the privilege card CA to be taken out from the privilege card discharge device 1450 by the player. The process (S2115) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the driving amount of the transfer motor 1451c is still less than the predetermined amount as a result of the confirmation in S4208 (S4208: No), the privilege card CA being transferred from the confirmation position has not yet reached the discharge position. Therefore, the processing of S4209 to S4211 is skipped, this card ejection processing (S2115) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  If the card ejection flag 223l is off as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4201 (S4201: No), it is confirmed whether the card transfer flag 223n is on (S4205).

  If the card transfer flag 223n is off (S4205; No) as a result of checking in the process of S4205, it is not the situation for transferring the privilege card CA, so this card discharge process (S2115) is terminated and the process returns to the main process. .

  On the other hand, if the card transfer flag 223n is turned on as a result of checking in the process of S4205 (S4205: Yes), it is checked whether the transfer motor 1451c is being driven (S4206).

  If the transfer motor 1451c is not being driven as a result of checking in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is started (S4207), this card ejection process (S2115) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. . As a result of the process of S4207, transfer from the initial position of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time (that is, the privilege card CA located on the bottom surface side of the storage member 1451) to the confirmation position is started.

  On the other hand, if the transfer motor 1451c is being driven as a result of the confirmation in S4206 (S4206: Yes), it is confirmed whether the transfer motor 1451c has been driven by a predetermined amount for transferring the privilege card CA from the initial position to the confirmation position. (S4212).

  When the transfer motor 1451c is driven by a predetermined amount as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4212, the privilege card CA has reached the confirmation position, and thus the drive of the transfer motor 1451c is stopped (S4213). The card transfer flag 223n is turned off (S4214), the card reading flag 223o is turned on (S4215), the card ejection process (S2115) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. When the card reading flag 223o is turned on by the processing of S4215, the card information of the privilege card CA is read by the discharging card reader 1453.

  On the other hand, if the driving amount of the transfer motor 1451c is still less than the predetermined amount as a result of checking in the processing of S4212, the privilege card CA being transferred from the initial position has not yet reached the checking position. Therefore, the processing of S4213 to S4215 is skipped, this card discharge processing (S2115) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This timer interruption process is executed every 2 ms by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the timer interruption process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, first, when the privilege card CA is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, whether or not the privilege card CA is taken out by the player. A discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) is performed to confirm whether or not. The detailed process of the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003), a discharge card confirmation process for reading the card information (the code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 is executed. (S3004). The detailed processing of the ejection card confirmation processing (S3004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the discharge card confirmation process (S3004), the reception part card confirmation process for reading the card information of the privilege card CA inserted into the holder part 1302a of the card information reading device 1300 is executed (S3005), and the timer interruption process Exit. Detailed processing of the receiving unit card confirmation processing (S3005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51, the above-described discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003), first, it is confirmed whether or not the card removal waiting flag 223m is on (S3301). At this time, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is off (A3301: No), the player is not waiting to take out the privilege card CA from the privilege card discharge device 1450, so this discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003) is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S3301 (S3301: Yes), the privilege card CA is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, and the player has received the privilege card CA. Since it is in a state of waiting for removal, in such a case, it is confirmed whether the presence / absence detection sensor 1460 is off (S3302).

  If the presence / absence detection sensor 1460 is turned on as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3302 (S3302: No), the privilege card CA remains in the discharge position and has not yet been taken out, so this discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) ) Ends.

  On the other hand, if the presence / absence detection sensor 1460 is off (S3302: No) as a result of the confirmation in S3302, the removal of the privilege card CA is completed. The probability variation jackpot counter 223v is cleared to 0 so that the number of certain probability variation jackpots can be counted (S3303).

  After the processing of S3303, the card transfer flag 223n is turned on (S3304), the card removal waiting flag 223m is turned off (S3305), and this discharge completion confirmation processing (S3003) is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the above-described ejection card confirmation processing (S3004) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a discharge card check process (S3004) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in FIG. 52, in this discharge card confirmation process (S3004), first, it is confirmed whether the card reading flag 223o is on (S3401). If the card reading flag 223o is off (S3401: No), Since the privilege card CA is not located at the confirmation position, in such a case, the discharge card confirmation process (S3004) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the card reading flag 223o is turned on as a result of checking in the process of S3401 (S34014: Yes), since the privilege card CA is located at the confirmation position, the card of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position. Information (code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) is read by the discharge card reader 1453 (S3402).

  Next, based on the read card information and the information stored in the card type table 222b, the type of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position, that is, the privilege card CA to be discharged next time (the content of the privilege) is determined. (S3403).

  After the process of S3403, a value indicating the type of the privilege card CA determined is stored in the discharge card memory 223j (S3404), the card reading flag 223o is turned off (S3405), and this discharge card confirmation process (S3004) is terminated. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the receiving unit card confirmation process (S3005) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the receiving unit card check process (S3005) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the receiving part card confirmation process (S3005), it is first confirmed whether or not a customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3501). The “customer waiting effect” is an effect that is displayed neither when the pachinko machine 10A is played by the player for a predetermined period of time, which is neither a variable display nor a jackpot effect, and is displayed regardless of the game state ( For example, it is an effect in which a title display, a demonstration display, and the like are performed.

  As a result of checking in the process of S3501, when the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S3501: Yes), it is checked whether the read button 1301 is pressed (S3502).

  If the read button 1301 is pressed as a result of the confirmation in S3502 (S3502: Yes), it is confirmed whether the card attachment flag 223p is on (S3503).

  If the card mounting flag 223p is turned on as a result of checking in the process of S3503 (S3503: Yes), the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned off (not excited), so the card mounting flag 223p is turned on (S3504). The mounting solenoid 1304 is turned on (S3505).

  After the processing of S3505, a receiving unit card reading process for reading the card information of the privilege card CA (the code pattern formed in the card information area 1602) by the receiving unit card reader 1303 is executed (S3506). The confirmation process (S3005) is terminated. Detailed processing of the receiving unit card reading process (S3506) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the card mounting flag 223p is off (S3503: No) as a result of checking in the process of S3503, the mounting solenoid 1304 is on (excited), so the card mounting flag 223p is turned off (S3507). The solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3508).

  After the processing of S3508, the gold card flag 223q is turned off (S3509), the silver card flag 223r is turned off (S3510), the copper card flag 223s is turned off (S3511), and the receiving card confirmation processing (S3005) is ended. To do.

  In addition, as a result of confirmation in the process of S3501, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not a customer waiting effect but a variable display or a jackpot effect is displayed (S3501: No), or the process of S3502 As a result of checking, if the read button 1301 is not pressed (S3502: No), the receiving card checking process (S3005) is terminated without performing the processes of S3503 to S3511.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the value of the card attachment flag 223p is changed every time the read button 1301 is operated. It is configured to be inverted.

  Next, the receiving unit card reading process (S3506) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the receiving card reading process (S3506) executed in the receiving card confirmation process (S3005).

  As shown in FIG. 54, in this receiving unit card reading process (S3506), first, the card information of one or a plurality of privilege cards CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 (that is, a code that passes through the transparent unit 1302). The pattern is read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 (S3601).

  After the process of S3601, based on the read card information and the information stored in the card type table 222b, the privilege card CA included in one or more privilege cards CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 is displayed. Each type is discriminated (S3602).

  After the process of S3602, it is checked whether or not the privilege card CA is in a badly mounted state (S3603). If it cannot be determined (S3603: No), the privilege card CA is correctly mounted. It is confirmed whether or not (S3604).

  Whether or not the privilege card CA is mounted correctly is determined based on the region E (see FIG. 39 (e)) indicating that the mounting direction is opposite to the privilege card region 1602 read by the receiving unit card reader 1303. It can be determined by whether or not it is painted. More specifically, if the area E is not filled, the orientation of the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 is all correct, and if the area E is filled, it is attached with the wrong front and back. It is determined that the privilege card CA exists.

  As a result of checking in the process of S3604, if the wearing direction of the privilege card CA is correct (S3604: Yes), the privilege card CA that is the “gold card” is included, that is, the area 1602a (see FIG. 39A). It is confirmed whether or not is filled (S3605). As a result of checking in the process of S3605, if the privilege card CA which is a “gold card” is included (S3605: Yes), the gold card flag 223q is turned on (S3606), and the process proceeds to S3607. On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S3605, if the privilege card CA that is a “gold card” is not included (S3605: No), the process of S3606 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3607.

  In the process of S3607, it is confirmed whether the privilege card CA which is a “silver card” is included, that is, whether the area 1602b (see FIG. 39A) is filled (S3607). As a result of checking in the process of S3607, if the privilege card CA which is a “silver card” is included (S3607: Yes), the silver card flag 223r is turned on (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S3607, if the privilege card CA which is a “silver card” is not included (S3607: No), the process of S3608 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3609.

  In the process of S3609, it is confirmed whether or not a privilege card CA that is a “copper card” is included, that is, whether or not there is a filled section in the area 1602c (see FIG. 39A) (S3609). If the privilege card CA that is the “silver card” is included as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3609 (S3609: Yes), the copper card flag 223s is turned on (S3610).

  After the processing of S3610, the flags 223t1 to 223t5 in the odd copper card flag area 223t are set according to the presence or absence of the copper card corresponding to the main symbol corresponding to the odd number among the copper cards (S3611).

  In the process of S3611, the corresponding flag (223t1 to 223t5) is turned on for the copper card corresponding to the main symbol corresponding to the odd number that is included as the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300. To do.

  After the processing of S3611, the flags 223u1 to 223u4 of the even copper card flag area 223u are set according to the presence or absence of the copper card corresponding to the main symbol corresponding to the even number among the copper cards (S3612). The copy card reading process (S3506) is terminated.

  In the process of S3612, the corresponding flag (223u1 to 223u4) is turned on for the copper card corresponding to the main symbol corresponding to the even number included as the privilege card CA attached to the card information reading device 1300. To do.

  On the other hand, if the privilege card CA which is the “copper card” is not included as a result of the confirmation in the process of S3609 (S3609: No), the process of S3611, S3612 is skipped, and the receiving part card reading process (S3506). ) Ends.

  If the result of the confirmation in S3603 is indistinguishable (S3603: No), or the result of the confirmation in S3604 is an incorrect orientation of the privilege card CA (S3604: Yes), an error occurs. Is executed (S3613), the card mounting flag 223p is turned off (S3614), the mounting solenoid 1304 is turned off (S3615), and the receiving card reading process (S3506) is terminated.

  According to the receiving unit card reading process (S3506), the card information read by the receiving unit card reader 1303 is analyzed, and then the gold card flag 223q, the silver card flag 223r, the copper card flag 223s, and the odd copper card area. Since the flags 223t1 to 223t5 of the 223t or the flags 223u1 to 223u4 of the even copper card flag area 223u are set, even when a plurality of privilege cards CA are attached to the card information reader 1300, A privilege (in this embodiment, a jackpot effect or a reach effect) can be given according to the number of privilege cards CA installed.

  Therefore, the player's interest can be directed to acquiring various privilege cards CA. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is not tired of the game, and the interest in the game over the long term. Can be maintained.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 </ b> A of the present embodiment, the card information (privilege content) of the privilege card CA to be given next time is read (detected) in advance by the discharge card reader 1453. In accordance with the read card information, the grant condition of the privilege card CA (that is, the privilege card CA to be given next time) is changed.

  Therefore, since the grant frequency of the privilege card CA changes according to the card information (the content of the privilege), the progress of the game can be suppressed, and as a result, the interest in the game can be extended over a longer period. Can be maintained by the player.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the requirement for establishing the grant condition (in this embodiment, the number of chances of a probable change) is changed according to the card information of the privilege card CA to be given next time, and the privilege card CA is changed. Since the difficulty level of establishment of the grant conditions is changed, the player can be made to perceive the difference in card information (privilege content).

  In particular, since the granting condition is changed by changing the number of occurrences based on the occurrence of a common gaming state (in this embodiment, the occurrence of a probable big hit), the player can sense the difference in card information. It is easy to grasp, and it is easy to give a sense of expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA, it is easy to create a situation where the player is not tired of the game, and the interest in the game can be maintained for a long time.

  By the way, the pachinko machine 10A according to the present embodiment is configured not to notify (suggest) the type of the privilege card CA (the content of the privilege) to be discharged next time before the discharge. The timing at which the card CA is discharged cannot be predicted, and the type of privilege card CA that can be acquired next time cannot be predicted. The player tends to recognize that the scarcity is high and the value is so high that it is difficult to acquire, so if the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time cannot be predicted, the privilege card CA is discharged. The longer the period until, the player can have a sense of expectation for the acquisition of a valuable reward card CA.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 </ b> A of the present embodiment, the card information of the privilege card CA is configured as a code pattern formed in the light transmissive card information area 1602. Therefore, when a plurality of privilege cards CA are stacked, a new code pattern can be formed by a combination of code patterns formed in the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA.

  Here, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, since a privilege (in this embodiment, a jackpot effect or a reach effect) according to the number of privilege cards CA attached to the card information reading device 1300 is given, Since the player expects to obtain various privilege cards CA, the player can create a situation in which the player is not tired of the game, and can maintain his interest in the game for a long period of time.

  By the way, as above-mentioned, since the privilege card CA of this embodiment has the code pattern as card information formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602, a plurality of privilege cards CA overlap in the same direction. And stored in the privilege card discharge device 1450, the card information area 1602 of each privilege card CA overlaps at the initial position. Pattern) is difficult to read.

  For such a problem, each privilege card CA is arranged (telescopic arrangement) so that each card information area 1602 in the adjacent privilege card CA is on the alternate side, and the code pattern of the card information area 1602 located on each side is changed. The problem can also be solved by providing a configuration in which two readable code readers are provided.

  However, when such a solution is adopted, the manager who manages the privilege card CA (for example, the manager of the hall where the pachinko machine that can grant the privilege card CA is installed) or the manufacturer of the privilege card CA, When the privilege card CA is stored in the privilege card discharge device 1450, it is necessary to rearrange the direction of the privilege card CA or confirm the direction so that each privilege card CA is in a lever arrangement. The load on handling is high.

  Further, since code readers are required at two locations, the manufacturing cost increases, and control for causing a code pattern to be read by one of the two code readers is complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the confirmation position where the card information (code pattern) of the privilege card CA to be given next time is separated from the initial position where other privilege cards CA are stored. Since it is configured to be read (detected) after being transferred to the card, a transparent card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be given next time without using a large number of privilege cards CA, A state where the transparent card information area 1602 of the other privilege card CA does not overlap can be created.

  Therefore, since the card information which the privilege card CA given next time has can be detected by the card reader 1453 for 1 discharge, and the load with respect to the handling of the privilege card CA can also be suppressed, it is given next time. The card information of the privilege card CA can be suitably detected.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 62. In 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, the grant conditions for granting the privilege card CA to a player were comprised as conditions based on the frequency | count of occurrence per probability variation jackpot.

  In contrast, in the third embodiment, the grant condition for granting the privilege card CA to the player is the first grant condition based on the number of occurrences of probability variation jackpots and the second grant condition based on the number of occurrences of outlier reach. It consists of two types of grant conditions. In the third embodiment, the same parts as those in the second embodiment and the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10B according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, a discharge mode change button 1800 is provided on the front surface of the upper plate 17 in the pachinko machine 10B. This discharge mode change button 1800 is a button for allowing a player to select a first grant condition (grant condition based on the number of occurrences of probability variation jacks) or a second grant condition (grant condition based on the number of occurrences of outlier reach). It is.

  FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10B in the third embodiment, and FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226, a lamp display device 227 that performs lamp display, and a discharge card reader. In addition to 1453, transfer motor 1451c, presence / absence detection sensor 1461, receiving unit card reader 1302, mounting solenoid 1304, read button 1301, and the like, a discharge mode change button 1800 is connected.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment includes a discharge card memory 223j, a card discharge confirmation flag 223k, a card discharge flag 223l, a card removal waiting flag 223m, Transfer flag 223n, card reading flag 223o, card mounting flag 223p, gold card flag 223q, silver card flag 223r, copper card flag 223s, odd copper card flag area 223t, even copper card flag area 223u, And a probability variation big hit counter 223v, a probability variation discharge mode flag 223w, and a detach reach counter 223x.

  The discharge mode flag 223w is a mode in which the mode for granting the privilege card CA to the player is a mode using the first grant condition based on the number of occurrences per probability variation (probability variation mode), or based on the number of occurrences of detachment reach It is a flag indicating whether or not the mode using the second provision condition (displacement reach discharge mode).

  If the discharge mode flag 223w is off, it indicates that the mode for giving the privilege card CA to the player is the probability variation discharge mode, while if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, the privilege card CA is given to the player. This indicates that the mode to perform is the detach reach discharge mode.

  The discharge mode flag 223w is initialized (turned off) in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 10B is turned on. That is, the pachinko machine 10B according to the present embodiment is set to a sure change discharge mode when the power is turned on.

  And, when the discharge mode button 1800 is pressed during the customer waiting effect (the effect displayed when the pachinko machine 10B is not played by the player for a predetermined time), the state is inverted each time. It is configured as follows. That is, it is turned off if the discharge mode flag 223w is on, and is turned off if the discharge mode flag 223w is on.

  The detach reach counter 223x is a counter for counting the number of times detach reach occurs in the detach reach discharge mode. This outreach counter 223x is cleared to 0 in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 10B is turned on, and then the command corresponding to the disengagement from the main controller 110 (in this embodiment, the outreach reach (front / rear outreach, other than front / rear) Each time a stop symbol command) corresponding to an outlier reach is received, one is added. Then, the value is cleared to 0 each time the privilege card CA is taken out by the player (that is, every time the privilege card CA is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position).

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10B according to the present embodiment, when in the detach reach discharge mode, the detach reach counter 223x is set based on the type of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j. When the number of times reached, the grant condition is satisfied, and the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is transferred to the discharge position.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the third embodiment. This timer interruption process is executed every 2 ms by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the timer interrupt process of the third embodiment, first, when the player gives an instruction to change the discharge mode (probability change discharge mode or outlier reach discharge mode) by operating the discharge mode change button 1800. Then, a discharge mode changing process for changing the discharge mode is executed (S3006). Details of the discharge mode changing process (3006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the discharge mode change process (S3006) is executed, a discharge completion confirmation process is executed (S3007). This discharge completion confirmation process (S3007) is similar to the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) of the first embodiment. When the privilege card CA is located at the discharge position of the privilege card discharge device 1450, the privilege card CA is played. This is a process for confirming whether or not it has been taken out by a person. Details of the discharge completion confirmation process (S3007) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the execution of the discharge completion confirmation process (S3007), the above-described discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 52) and the receiving unit card confirmation process (see FIG. 53) are executed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the discharge mode change process (S3006) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the discharge mode change process (S3006) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58).

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the discharge mode changing process (S3006), first, it is confirmed whether or not a customer waiting effect (demo screen) is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S4301). When the customer waiting effect is being displayed on the third symbol display device 80 (S4301: Yes), it is confirmed whether the discharge mode change button 1800 has been pressed (S4302).

  If the discharge mode change button 1800 is pressed as a result of checking in the process of S4302 (S4302: Yes), it is checked whether the discharge mode flag 223w is on (S4303).

  As a result of checking in the process of S4303, when the discharge mode flag 223w is OFF, that is, when the probability change discharge mode using the first grant condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability change large is (S4303: No), the discharge is performed. The discharge mode flag 223w is turned on (S4304) and the process proceeds to S4305 in order to change the mode to the probability change discharge mode using the second provision condition based on the number of occurrences of outreach.

  On the other hand, if the discharge mode flag 223w is turned on as a result of the confirmation in S4303, that is, if the release reach discharge mode is selected (S4303: Yes), the discharge mode is changed to the sure change discharge mode. The mode flag 223w is turned off (S4306), and the process proceeds to S4305.

  In the process of S4305, a discharge mode change command is output to the display control device 114 (S4305). When the discharge mode change command is output to the display control device 114 by the process of S4305, the display control device 114 displays on the LCD of the third symbol display device 81 a display indicating to the player that the discharge mode has been changed. . After the process of S4305, this discharge mode change process (S3006) is terminated.

  Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4301, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 80 is not the customer waiting effect but the variable display or the jackpot effect is displayed (S4301: No), or the process of S4302 As a result of checking, if the discharge mode change button 1800 is not pressed (S4302: No), the discharge mode change process (S3006) is terminated without performing the processes of S4303 to S4305.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, when the waiting mode effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the discharge mode flag 223w is set each time the discharge mode change button 1800 is operated. The value is reversed and the discharge mode is changed.

  Next, the above-described discharge completion confirmation process (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the discharge completion confirmation process (S3007) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58).

  As shown in FIG. 60, in this discharge completion confirmation process (S3007), first, it is confirmed whether or not the card removal waiting flag 223m is on (S3301). At this time, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is off (A3301: No), this discharge completion confirmation process (S3007) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the card removal waiting flag 223m is on (S3301: Yes) as a result of the confirmation in S3301, it is confirmed whether the presence / absence detection sensor 1460 is off (S3302). At this time, if the presence / absence detection sensor 1460 is on (S3302: No), the discharge completion confirmation process (S3003) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the presence / absence detection sensor 1460 is off (S3302: No) as a result of checking in the process of S3302, the probability variation big hit counter 223v is cleared to 0 (S3303), and the outreach reach counter 223x is cleared to 0 (S3306).

  After the processing of S3303, the card transfer flag 223n is turned on (S3304), the card removal waiting flag 223m is turned off (S3305), and this discharge completion confirmation processing (S3007) is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2117) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2117) of the third embodiment.

  The grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2117) of the third embodiment is executed in place of the assignment condition establishment confirmation process (S2114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 43) of the second embodiment described above. Process.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2117), first, it is confirmed whether or not the discharge mode flag 223w is on (S4110). If the discharge mode flag 223w is OFF as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4110 (S4110: No), the process of S4104 to S4109 is executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, and the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2117) ) Ends.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, when the discharge mode is the probability variation discharge mode using the first grant condition based on the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot, the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot is determined at that time. When the number of times set according to the type of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position is reached, the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on as the grant condition (first grant condition) is satisfied.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S4110, when the discharge mode flag 223w is on, that is, when it is the outreach discharge mode using the second grant condition based on the number of occurrences of outreach (S4110: Yes), In order to confirm the establishment of the second provision condition, the detach reach discharge mode process is executed (S4111), and the provision condition establishment confirmation process (S2117) is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 62, the above-described detach reach discharge mode process (S4111) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the detach reach discharge mode process (S4111) executed in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (S2117).

  As shown in FIG. 62, in this outlier reach discharge mode process (S4111), first, the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command by the process in S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) It is confirmed whether or not it indicates a reach other than front / rear deviation (S4401).

  If the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command does not indicate a miss reach as a result of checking in the process of S4401 (S4401: No), this miss reach discharge mode process (S4111) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command indicates a miss reach (S4401: Yes) as a result of checking in the process of S4401, the miss reach counter 223x is incremented by 1 (S4402), and the discharge card The value stored in the memory 223j, that is, the card information of the privilege card CA which is located at the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 and is discharged next time is read (S4403).

  After the process of S4403, it is confirmed whether the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4404).

  As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4404, if it is a value indicating that the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a “gold card” (S4404: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “gold card”. In order to confirm whether or not the second grant condition is satisfied, the process of S4405 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, since the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “money card” is the occurrence of 300 outreach, the value of the outreach counter 223x is 300 or more in the processing of S4405. Is confirmed (S4405).

  If the value of the outreach counter 223x is 300 or more as a result of the confirmation in S4405 (S4405: Yes), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “money card” is satisfied, and the card is discharged. The confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4406), and the release reach discharge mode process (S4111) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the outlier reach counter 223x is less than 300 (S4105: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4405, the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “money card” is not established. The process of S4406 is skipped, and the detach reach discharge mode process (S4111) is terminated.

  Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4404, if the value is not the value indicating that the next privilege card CA to be discharged is a “gold card” (S4404: Yes), the value read from the discharge card memory 223j is It is confirmed whether or not the value of the privilege card CA to be discharged is a “silver card” (S4407).

  As a result of the confirmation in the process of S4407, if the value of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4407: Yes), it is set for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card”. The process of S4408 is executed to confirm whether or not the second grant condition is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, since the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is 150 occurrences of outreach, the value of the outreach counter 223x is 150 or more in the process of S4408. Is confirmed (S4408).

  If the value of the outreach counter 223x is 150 or more as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4408 (S4408: Yes), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “silver card” is satisfied, and the card is discharged. The confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4406), and the release reach discharge mode process (S4111) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the outreach counter 223x is less than 150 (S4408: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4408, the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “silver card” is not established. The process of S4406 is skipped, and the detach reach discharge mode process (S4111) is terminated.

  Further, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4407, when the value of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is not a value indicating that it is a “silver card” (S4407: Yes), the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is “copper”. Since it is a “card”, the processing of S4409 is executed to confirm whether or not the second grant condition set for the privilege card CA which is a “copper card” is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, since the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is a “copper card” is the occurrence of 30 outreach, the value of the outreach counter 223x is 30 or more in the process of S4409. Is confirmed (S4409).

  As a result of checking in the process of S4409, if the value of the outreach counter 223x is 30 or more (S4409: Yes), the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is satisfied, and the card is discharged. The confirmation flag 223k is turned on (S4410), and the detach reach discharge mode process (S4111) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the outreach counter 223x is less than 30 (S4409: No) as a result of the confirmation in the process of S4409, the second grant condition for the privilege card CA that is the “copper card” is not established. The process of S4410 is skipped, and the detach reach discharge mode process (S4111) is terminated.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, when the discharge mode is the release reach discharge mode using the second grant condition based on the number of occurrences of release reach, the number of occurrences of release reach is When the number of times set according to the type of privilege card CA located at the confirmation position at the time is reached, it is determined that the grant condition (second grant condition) is satisfied, and the card discharge confirmation flag 223k is turned on.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, in accordance with the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800 by the player, the grant condition of the reward coin CA is changed to the first grant condition (occurrence of probability variation big hit). The grant condition based on the number of times) or the second grant condition (the grant condition based on the number of occurrences of outlier reach).

  Therefore, since a plurality of grant conditions are provided, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is not bored with the game. In addition, since the selection (selection) of the grant condition can be performed based on the player's intention, the game in which the privilege coin CA can be acquired by the establishment of the grant condition is performed according to the grant condition reflecting the player's own intention. Can do.

  Therefore, by providing a plurality of grant conditions, it is possible to improve the gameability of a game in which the privilege coin CA can be acquired by satisfying the grant conditions, and to maintain interest in the game for a long time. . In addition, since the player's intention can be reflected in the selection of the granting conditions, the player's consciousness can be easily directed toward the acquisition of the privilege card CA, and a situation in which the player hardly feels bored with the game is created. be able to.

  Here, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the present embodiment, even after the provision condition of the privilege coin CA is changed in accordance with the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800 by the player, The information accumulated in this embodiment (in this embodiment, the number of occurrences of probability variation jackpot or outlier reach) is held until the discharge of the privilege card CA scheduled to be discharged next time at the time when the grant condition is changed is completed. .

  Therefore, even after the grant condition of the privilege coin CA is changed according to the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800 by the player, even if the grant condition is restored again, the game can be continued from before the change. it can. Therefore, it becomes possible to use the grant condition that seems to be optimal according to the situation, and it can prevent the player's expectation for the acquisition of the privilege card CA from being impaired, and the interest in the game over a long period of time can be prevented. Can be maintained.

  The present invention has been described based on one embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the first embodiment, when the coin information is given as the special value, the coin form using the coin (privilege coin C) as the medium is used. However, the special value is provided by the special coin C or the like. The present invention is not limited to a tangible form using a medium, and may be provided in an intangible form (that is, a form of data such as coin information itself) without using a medium for holding information.

  When providing information as a special value in the form of data, a portable terminal (such as a mobile phone or a PDA (Personal Digital Assistants)) or a USB memory held by the player when providing the data as the special value A configuration may be adopted in which it is stored in a portable small memory or the like.

  In the first embodiment, a coin (privilege coin C) is used as a medium for holding information (coin information) as a special value. However, the form of a medium for holding information as a special value is a coin. The present invention is not limited, and various media such as cards, sticks, and other tangible objects (for example, stuffed animals, key chains, etc.) can be used.

  In the first embodiment, the special value information (coin information) is stored in the IC tag 602 embedded in the privilege coin C. However, the built-in wireless communication is possible like the IC tag 602. It is good also as a structure memorize | stored in IC chip which does not have an antenna.

  When using an IC chip that does not have a built-in antenna, the privilege coin C is provided with an output terminal for outputting information stored in the IC chip, and an input terminal that can be connected to the output terminal is provided as a privilege coin. What is necessary is just to read the coin information provided in the waiting member 470 in the payout device 450 and stored in the privilege coin C.

  In the first embodiment, the special value information (coin information) is configured in the form of data stored in the IC tag 602. However, the barcode, the color of the medium, the pattern of the medium, the medium Information that can be detected by an optical reading device (for example, an optical sensor, a barcode reader, etc.), such as the shape of the medium (such as a concavo-convex pattern on the outer periphery of the medium or the outer shape of the medium (for example, the shape of a stuffed animal)), or It may be configured in the form of information that can be identified by a shape recognition device (for example, a shape recognition device performed using imaging data (image) of an object).

  In the second and third embodiments, the plurality of sections formed in the light-transmissive card information area 1602 are filled so as to have a pattern corresponding to the card information. May be a bar code or a shape (pattern) according to card information.

  In the second and third embodiments, the plurality of sections formed in the card information area 1602 are filled. However, the filling color is not limited to black, but various colors (for example, red, blue, etc.). May be used. In such a case, the card reader can detect the color and detect (read out) the card information according to the filled color.

  At this time, you may comprise so that the filling color may differ in front and back. When the fill color is different between the front and back, it is possible to determine the front and back of the privilege card CA based on the fill color.

  In addition, when the fill color is multicolored, the colored portion may be light transmissive. When the filling pattern constituting the card information is configured to be light transmissive, when reading the card information of the privilege card CA attached to the card information 1300, light is irradiated from the reading side by the value content detection means, and the reflected light The type of privilege card CA that has been installed can be determined from the color. Alternatively, it is possible to irradiate light from the side opposite to the reading side by the value content detection means, and to determine the type of the privilege card CA mounted from the color of the transmitted light.

  In addition, a pattern can be formed in the position which overlaps when a privilege card CA is piled up by making the painting pattern which constitutes card information of privilege card CA light-transmitting, and it is changed by the color of transmitted light or reflected light. It is also possible to determine the combination.

  In the second and third embodiments, the special value (card information) is configured as a pattern formed in the light-transmitting card information area 1602. However, like the privilege coin C illustrated in the first embodiment. An IC tag may be used. Since the value content detection means in the second and third embodiments detects card information at a confirmation position separated from the initial position of the medium, the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is read. In this case, erroneous detection due to confusion with the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the storage means can be prevented.

  In the second and third embodiments, the special value (card information) is configured as a pattern formed in the light-transmitting card information area 1602. However, the shape of the card or coin (uneven pattern on the surface, It is good also as a structure which makes a shape according to card | curd information a concave-convex pattern and an outer periphery shape), and acquires card information using an optical sensor or a shape recognition apparatus. Since the value content detection means in the second and third embodiments detects card information at a confirmation position separated from the initial position of the medium, the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is It is possible to detect without confusion with the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the storage means.

  In the second and third embodiments, the card (privilege card CA) is used as the medium having the special value (card information). However, the form of the medium is not limited to the card. Various media such as sticks and other tangible objects (for example, stuffed animals, key chains, etc.) can be used.

  Further, in the second and third embodiments, the back surface 1601b of the privilege card CA is configured to be white, but it is not limited to white, and any surface that can read the code pattern formed in the card information area 1602 well. Good.

  For example, when the color of the code pattern is black or dark (for example, dark green or amber), white or light (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink, light blue, etc.) When the color of the code pattern is white or light, it can be black or dark solid. Further, the surface is not limited to a non-ground surface, but is a surface on which a fine pattern is formed, or a surface that is designed at a position that does not overlap with the card information area 1602 of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time at the confirmation position. May be.

  Similarly, the white uncoated surface of the plate member 1305 and the white uncoated surface of the plate member 1455b are not limited to white and may be any surface that can satisfactorily read the code pattern formed in the card information area 1602.

  In the privilege card discharge device 1450 of the second and third embodiments, as shown in FIG. 37, the presence / absence detection sensor 1461 is provided on the side close to the discharge port 1451a between the lower plate unit 15 and the discharge port 1451a. However, the presence / absence detection sensor 1461 may be provided on the side close to the lower plate unit 15 (that is, on the opening 1054 side) between the lower plate unit 15 and the discharge port 1451a.

  Here, by setting the presence / absence detection sensor 1461 to a position where the tip of the privilege card CA located at the confirmation position can be detected, the presence / absence detection sensor 1461 can be used only for confirmation of discharge completion as in the second and third embodiments. It can also be used as a sensor for detecting arrival at the confirmation position when the privilege card CA is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position.

  In each of the above embodiments, the medium for playing a game (game ball) and the medium for obtaining a privilege (privilege coin C or privilege card CA) are different from each other. The medium for obtaining the privilege may be the same form, and the medium for obtaining the privilege may be configured to be usable as a medium for playing the game.

  In the first embodiment, the coin information as the special value is configured as information indicating a symbol used in a new reach production mode that can be displayed by attaching the privilege coin C to the coin information reading device 300. Alternatively, it may be configured as information on characters appearing at the time of reach production.

  In the first embodiment, the coin information as the special value is converted into one main symbol out of the five types of main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9). However, instead of this, it may be configured as information indicating one main symbol among the five types of main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8). Good. Or you may comprise as information which shows one main symbol among all the main symbols.

  In the first embodiment, the coin information as the special value is used in a new reach production mode that can be displayed by attaching the bonus coin C to the coin information reading device 300 (specifically, an odd number. It is configured as information indicating one main symbol) among the five types of main symbols (identification information) corresponding to the numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9). Information that can change the game content (for example, information that can temporarily increase the jackpot probability), information that guides the game strategy, and the like may be used.

  Similarly, in the second and third embodiments, the card information as the special value is attached to the card information reading device 1300 with the card information reading device 1300, and a predetermined effect (a jackpot effect or a reach effect) is given to the third symbol display device. The information that can be displayed in 81 is not limited to this, but is not limited to this, information that can change the game content (for example, information that can temporarily increase the jackpot probability), and game capture It may be information that guides the law.

  Further, the card information as the special value may be information that allows a predetermined stop symbol to be displayed after the variable display by attaching the privilege card CA to the card information reading device 1300.

  Moreover, in each said embodiment, in order to obtain a privilege, it was set as the structure which mounts the privilege coin C or the privilege card CA in the pachinko machine 10 (coin information reading device 300 or the card information reading device 1300), However, The privilege acquisition method Is not limited to being mounted on the pachinko machine 10. For example, it is good also as a structure which a player acquires a privilege by exchanging for a prize based on the coin information (for example, point) memorize | stored in privilege coin C in a prize exchange. Alternatively, when the player himself / herself reads and uses information using an information processing device (for example, a personal computer) connected to an information reading device (reader that can read data from various media such as an IC tag reader), the player The structure which acquires a privilege etc. may be sufficient.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd, 3rd embodiment, when the privilege card CA (gold card and silver card) used as a specific combination is mounted | worn with the card information reader 1300, it will appear only after combining these privilege cards CA. It was configured to display a jackpot presentation. Instead, when a privilege card CA that is a specific combination is attached to the card information reading device 1300, the privilege card CA combination type or number of combinations is displayed as a privilege that appears for the first time by combining these privilege cards CA. It is good also as a structure which performs the special reach production according to. At this time, you may make it perform the reach production of the type developed according to the combination type or the number of combination of privilege card CA.

  In the first embodiment, after the suggestion condition is established, the special symbol content (special value of special value) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by displaying, on the third symbol display device 81, a variable display or a stop display using the symbol corresponding to the coin information. However, when the information as the special value is information indicating a numerical value (for example, points), the numerical value may be displayed at the time of variable display or stop display.

  Or it is good also as a structure which digitizes the information as a special value and displays the numerical value at the time of a variable display or a stop display. For example, when there is a high or low value due to a rare value or the like between each kind of special value, a higher numerical value may be displayed at the time of variable display or stop display. In this case, what is necessary is just to set it as the structure which has the table and function which digitize the information as special value.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, when coin information as special value was suggested, the change display and stop display which are displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 were comprised similarly except the symbol which coin information shows. When the information as the special value has a high or low value, the mode of the variable display or stop display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the high or low value.

  In the first embodiment, the coin information of the privilege coin C is acquired based on the coin type table 222a, and a value indicating the type of coin is acquired and stored in the payout coin memory 223a or the receiving coin memory 223b. However, the coin information of the privilege coin C may be stored in the payout coin memory 223a or the receiving coin memory 223b as a value indicating the type of coin as it is.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the suggestion condition is established when the variation pattern command corresponding to the complete detachment is continuously received a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), but this corresponds to the complete detachment. Not only the variation pattern command but also a suggestion condition may be established when a variation pattern command corresponding to outlier reach (rear out-of-front reach, reach other than out of front / rear) is continuously received a predetermined number of times.

  In the first embodiment, the suggestion condition is established when the variation pattern command corresponding to complete deviation is continuously received a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). The suggestion condition may be satisfied when the ratio of complete deviation with respect to the total fluctuation is equal to or less than a predetermined value in a period starting from the timing when the privilege coin C is paid out. Alternatively, the suggestion condition may be satisfied when a ratio of deviation (complete deviation, reach before / after deviation, reach other than deviation outside) in a predetermined period is equal to or less than a predetermined value.

  As in the first embodiment, the suggestion condition is that at least one profit lottery (based on an advantageous state (big hit state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state) is performed based on the entrance to the first entrance 64. It is preferable that the conditions are based on the lottery result of (lottery of whether or not to generate).

  For example, by setting the suggestion condition that an outage (result of not generating an advantageous state) is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more, the outage is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more and the interest of the game is lost. However, by suggesting the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time, the player can have a sense of expectation for the acquisition of the special coin C. Therefore, the player can be kept interested in the game. .

  Alternatively, by setting as a suggestion condition that the result of generating the jackpot state is obtained, the type of bonus coin C to be paid out next time is suggested together with the occurrence of the jackpot state. A new game is added to the game by the lottery provided by a typical game machine, so that the interest of the game is improved and the player can maintain interest in the game for a long time.

  In addition, the establishment of the suggestion condition is based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 that serves as a trigger for starting the variable display of the identification information (the LED 37a and the design) in the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81. Preferably.

  With this configuration, a suggestion of the type of bonus coin C to be paid out next time is performed along with variable display (dynamic display) using identification information performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a player who visually recognizes this variable display may not only provide the same stop indication as a conventional general gaming machine, but also acquire a special value not found in a conventional general gaming machine. You can have a sense of anticipation. Therefore, the change (variation) of game play is more abundant than conventional general gaming machines, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which establishes suggestion conditions according to the length of game time. For example, the number of rotations of the variable display, the period during which the player touches the operation handle 51, the period when the player inputs the start of the game to the pachinko machine 10 and the switch is operated, etc. It may be configured such that the suggestion condition is satisfied when the game time is set and the game time exceeds a predetermined period.

  In the first embodiment, in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 24), the confirmation process of the receiving unit coin flag 223h (the process of S2603) is performed prior to the confirmation process of the coin payout suggestion flag 223d (the process of S2604). The configuration is as follows. That is, when the special coin C is attached to the coin information reading device 300, the reach effect mode is set with priority on the special coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300. Instead of this, the confirmation process of the coin payout suggestion flag 223d may be executed prior to the confirmation process of the receiving unit coin flag 223h, and the reach effect based on the establishment of the suggestion condition may be set with priority.

  In the first embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to satisfy the suggestion condition based on the command received from the main control device 110. However, in the main control device 110, the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is used. It is good also as a structure which draws whether the kind of suggestion is performed and outputs the lottery result to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. Here, the lottery of whether or not to suggest the type of bonus coin C to be paid out next time is determined when the game ball passes a predetermined position on the game board 13 (for example, the ball enters the first entrance 64). Can be performed).

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (specifically, a variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot) from the main control device 110, the grant condition is Although established and the payout coin C is paid out, the granting conditions can be set as appropriate. For example, after the sound lamp control device 113 has received a command corresponding to complete failure from the main control device 110 a predetermined number of times, a command corresponding to reach other than normal big hit (probability big hit, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out) is received. It is good also as establishment of grant conditions.

  In the first embodiment, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 (that is, the reach effect mode set based on the suggestion condition being satisfied) and the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607. If the coin information of the target privilege coin C is the same as that (reach effect mode set based on the privilege coin C attached to the coin information reading device 300), it corresponds to the coin information. The same reach production mode using the symbols to be configured is set.

  Instead of this, the reach effect mode set by the process of S2605 and the reach effect mode set by the process of S2607 may be different reach effect modes using symbols corresponding to the same coin information. For example, in the reach effect mode set by the processing of S2605, the remaining one column fluctuates in a state where symbols corresponding to the values stored in the payout coin memory 223a are stopped and displayed in two of the three columns. Although it is a reach production mode, the reach production mode set by the processing of S2607 is the state in which the symbols corresponding to the values stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b are stopped and displayed in two of the three columns. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that is a new reach production mode including a notice production in which one row of the symbol fluctuates and the symbols pass as a group.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the contents of the special value (special value) are displayed by displaying the change display or the stop display using the pattern corresponding to the coin information on the third symbol display device 81. Type of value), but the special value is provided by notifying the content of the special value by voice from the voice output device 226 or by lamp display (lamp lighting, flashing, emission color change, etc.) by the lamp display device 227. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports the content of.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the contents of the special value (special value) are displayed by displaying the change display or the stop display using the pattern corresponding to the coin information on the third symbol display device 81. However, the first symbol display device 37 may perform a variable display or a stop display according to the symbol corresponding to the coin information.

  In the second and third embodiments, the grant condition is established when the number of occurrences of the probable big hit or miss reach reaches the specified number according to the card information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time, Although it was set as the structure which discharges privilege card | curd CA, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports (display or audio | voice output) the remaining frequency required in order to reach | attain provision conditions.

  In the second embodiment, the difference in the number of occurrences of the common gaming state (specifically, the probability variation jackpot) is the difference in the granting conditions, but the common gaming state in which the number of occurrences is counted. In addition to the probable big hit, it is also possible to apply a detachment reach, a detachment rotation speed, a number of shot balls, or the like. Moreover, you may comprise the difference in the elapsed time from the time of power activation to the pachinko machine 10A, and the difference in the period during which the player is touching the operation handle 51 as the difference in the grant conditions.

  At this time, for example, the gold card has 300 outreach reach conditions, the silver card has 150 outreach conditions, and the copper card has 30 outreach conditions. be able to. Alternatively, for a gold card, the detachment rotational speed of 3000 times is set as a grant condition, for a silver card, the detachment rotational speed of 1500 times is set as a grant condition, and for the copper card, a detachment rotational speed of 300 times is set as a grant condition. be able to. Also, for gold cards, the number of firings (number of firing balls) is 30,000, and for silver cards, the number of firings (number of firing balls) is 1500, and for copper cards, 300 times. The number of shots (number of shot balls) can be set as the condition for giving.

  Or even if it is not a common game state, the game state used as the object of grant conditions may differ in the game state in which the number of occurrences is counted according to the card information of the privilege card CA. For example, in the case of a gold card, 10 occurrences per probability change jackpot may be set as the granting condition, and in the case of a silver card, the occurrence condition is usually 10 hits per jackpot. In this case, a difference in establishment difficulty can be given to the grant conditions due to the difference in the game state. For example, the probability that the probability variation jackpot with a low selection probability is set as the granting condition is higher than the case where the normal jackpot is set as the granting condition.

  In addition, the gaming state targeted for the granting condition may be different from the gaming state in which the number of occurrences is counted according to the card information of the privilege card CA, as well as the number of occurrences for establishment. For example, in the case of a gold card, the occurrence condition can be 10 occurrences per probability variation, and in the case of a silver card, the occurrence condition can be 150 occurrences of detachment reach.

  In the third embodiment, when the discharge mode is changed based on the operation of the discharge mode change button 1800, the information accumulated for the previous grant conditions is retained. A configuration may be adopted in which information stored for previous grant conditions is cleared as the mode is changed.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd, 3rd embodiment, it was set as the structure which changes the provision conditions with respect to the privilege card CA discharged | emitted next time according to the card information of the privilege card CA memorize | stored in the discharge card memory 223j. In addition to the change of conditions, as in the first embodiment, in order to suggest (notify) the type of privilege card CA to be paid out next time, an effect according to the type of privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j ( (Variable display and / or stop display) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Alternatively, in accordance with the card information of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j, instead of changing the grant condition for the privilege card CA to be discharged next time, the payout is made next time as in the first embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 displays an effect (variation display and / or stop display) according to the type of the privilege card CA stored in the discharge card memory 223j in order to suggest (notify) the type of the privilege card CA to be displayed. You may comprise as follows.

  In the second embodiment, the probability variation big hit counter 223v is cleared to 0 when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on, the probability variation big hit counter 223v is not cleared to 0 and the power is shut off. The structure which can continue from the value of time may be sufficient.

  Since the probability variation jackpot is generated with a relatively low probability, by setting the probability variation jackpot counter 223v not to be cleared to 0 every time the power is turned on, the grant condition based on the number of probability variation jackpots may be established soon after the opening of the hall. obtain. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the discharge of the privilege card CA due to the establishment of the grant condition from the time of opening the hall.

  In the first embodiment, the payout coin detection process (see FIG. 29) and the receiving part coin detection process (see FIG. 30) are executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) executed every 2 ms. However, the payout coin detection process and the receiving part coin detection process may be executed in the main process (see FIG. 19).

  In the second embodiment, the discharge completion confirmation process (see FIG. 51), the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), and the receiving unit card confirmation process (see FIG. 53) are performed at the timer allocation executed every 2 ms. However, the discharge completion confirmation process, the discharge card confirmation process, and the receiving unit card confirmation process may be performed in the main process (see FIG. 43).

  In the third embodiment, the discharge mode change process (see FIG. 59), the discharge completion confirmation process (see FIG. 60), the discharge card confirmation process (see FIG. 52), and the receiving part card confirmation process (see FIG. 53). Is executed in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 50) executed every 2 ms, but the discharge mode change process, the discharge completion check process, the discharge card check process, and the receiving part card check process are mainly performed. It is good also as a structure performed by a process (refer FIG. 43).

  Moreover, in the said 2nd, 3rd embodiment, although it comprised so that the kind (contents of privilege) of privilege card CA discharged | emitted next time may not be alert | reported before the discharge | emission, it is similar to 1st Embodiment. Even when a predetermined suggestion condition is satisfied, even if it is configured to display a change display or a stop display according to the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time, and notify the type of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. Good.

  Further, in the second embodiment, if the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is a gold card, the grant condition is established by the occurrence of 10 probability change jackpots. The grant condition is established by the occurrence, and if the card is a copper card, the grant condition is established by the occurrence of one probability variation jackpot.

  Here, out of the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot as the grant condition, even if the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot has occurred in the main controller 110 for at least the last one, It may be configured to determine whether or not to count as the number of occurrences with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2). For example, when the benefit card CA to be discharged next time is a gold card, if the probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 9, the voice lamp control device 113 may receive a variation pattern command indicating the probability variation jackpot even if it receives a variation pattern command. Whether or not 1 is added to the counter 223v is determined with a probability of 1/2.

  With this configuration, even when the number of occurrences of probability variation jackpots as the grant condition is relatively small, the grant condition may not necessarily be satisfied in a short time. Therefore, the length of the period until the privilege card CA is discharged is not necessarily proportional to the value of the value of the privilege card CA, and the game that can acquire the privilege card CA can be inflated. It can be prevented from monotonic. In addition, since the player expects a privilege card CA having a high value since the period until the privilege card CA is discharged, the player may acquire a privilege card CA that is not so valuable. When the privilege card CA is acquired, it is possible to amplify the player's cheer for the acquisition.

  In addition, the grant condition is satisfied for the gold card, silver card, and copper card by the same number of occurrences of probability variation jackpots, but even if the probability variation jackpot occurrence has occurred in the main controller 110, the probability variation jackpot counter 223v. The probability of determining whether or not to count as the number of occurrences of probability change jackpot as the granting condition is determined according to the type of privilege card CA (whether it is a gold card, a silver card or a copper card) You may comprise. For example, the probability of deciding whether or not to count as the number of occurrences of probability variation jackpot as the grant condition by probability variation jackpot counter 223v is 1/5, 1/2, and 1 for gold card, silver card, and copper card, respectively. Good.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a stop command after receiving a command (fluctuation pattern command, stop symbol command) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot from the main control device 110, the coin The payout flag 223f is turned on, and the payout operation of the special coin C is performed. Similarly, in the second and third embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the command (the variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation big hit or the variation pattern command corresponding to the outlier reach) established from the main control device 110. When the stop command is received after the card is received, the card discharge flag 223l is turned on, and the privilege card CA is discharged.

  Instead of this, a counter that measures the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is provided in the sound lamp control device 113 without using a stop command, and the elapsed time from the start of the variable display is included in the variable pattern command. Alternatively, the coin payout flag 223f or the card discharge flag 223l may be turned on at the time when only the elapses.

  In each of the above embodiments, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 includes fluctuation time information and first hit type counter C2 information (that is, whether it is a normal jackpot or a probable change jackpot). However, the variation pattern command may be configured as a command including only the variation time information without including the information of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the first embodiment, when the variation pattern command is configured as a command including only the variation time information, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a jackpot based on the stop symbol command received from the main control device 110. Is usually a jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot.

  Further, in the second and third embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to distinguish the jackpot display mode (probability jackpot, normal jackpot) based on the stop symbol command received from the main controller 110. However, when the variation pattern command includes information of the first hit type counter C2 (that is, whether it is a normal jackpot or a probable variation jackpot), as in the first embodiment, based on the variation pattern command, It is good also as a structure which distinguishes whether the mode of jackpot is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot.

  In each of the above embodiments, the stop symbol command indicating the stop symbol set based on the first hit type counter C2 in the main controller 110 is used. However, instead of the stop symbol command, the first hit Using the type command including information on the type (probability big hit, normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, reach out of front / rear out of reach, complete out) according to the value of the type counter C2, the audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 uses the type command It is good also as a structure which determines a stop symbol based on the content of a command. In such a case, the sound lamp control device 113 can distinguish between jackpots (probability jackpots and normal jackpots) and misses (rear out of front and rear reach, reach other than out of front and rear, complete miss) based on the type command. it can.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, according to the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time in the reach other than the normal jackpot (the probability variation big hit, the back and forth outreach, the reach other than back and forth out). Since the new reach effect mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, after the suggestion condition is established, not only the new reach effect mode appears, but also the frequency of appearance is increased.

  In place of this, the new reach production mode corresponding to the coin information of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time is simply stopped in two of the three rows of symbols corresponding to the values stored in the payout coin memory 223a. The remaining one column may change in the displayed state, and it may be configured as a reach production mode similar to that at the time of normal reach change, and only to increase the appearance frequency of the reach production mode similar to that at the time of such normal reach change. .

  In the first embodiment, when the receiving unit coin flag 223h is turned on based on the fact that the reward coin C is attached to the pachinko machine 10 (coin information reading device 300), reach other than the normal jackpot (probability big hit, Since the new reach production mode as a privilege corresponding to the coin information of the attached special coin C is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out), a new reach production is provided. Not only the mode appears but also the frequency of appearance is increased.

  Instead of this, a new reach production mode as a benefit according to the coin information of the attached privilege coin C is simply displayed in two columns of three columns corresponding to the values stored in the receiving unit coin memory 223b. The remaining one column fluctuates in the state that is stopped and displayed, and the reach production mode is the same as that at the time of normal reach fluctuation, and only the appearance frequency of the same reach production mode at the time of such normal reach fluctuation is increased. Also good.

  In the first embodiment, the bonus coin C is stacked and stored in the storage member 460 of the bonus coin payout device 450 in the thickness direction. However, the bonus coin C is arranged on a plane. It is good also as a structure using the storage member of the form to store.

  Thus, when using the storage member of the form which arrange | positions and stores the privilege coin C on a plane, the extrusion member (attachment) which pushes the row | line | column of the privilege coin C arranged in a storage member from one end side to the standby member side. A force member) may be provided, and the privilege coin C stored in the storage member may be supplied to the standby member by extrusion (transfer) by the extrusion member. Alternatively, the privilege coins C may be arranged on the conveyor in the storage member, and the privilege coins C stored in the storage member by the transfer by the conveyor may be supplied to the standby member.

  In the first embodiment, the bonus coin C is stacked and stored in the storage member 460 of the bonus coin payout device 450 in the thickness direction (gravity direction), but each plane of the bonus coin C is stored. It is good also as a structure using the storage member of the form which arranges and stores in a horizontal direction.

  Thus, when using the storage member of the form which stores each plane of privilege coin C in the horizontal direction, it pushes out the row of privilege coin C lined up in the storage member from one end side to the standby member side (urging) A member) may be provided, and the privilege coin C stored in the storage member may be supplied to the standby member by extrusion (transfer) by the extrusion member. At this time, for example, from the discharge side of the storage member to the standby member, a downward sloping rail on which the outer peripheral surface of the special coin C can be placed is connected, and the special coin C is discharged to the rail from the discharge side of the storage member, The privilege coin C on the rail can be configured to run using gravity and be supplied to the standby member.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the special coin payout device 450, the special coin C to be paid out next time is read by reading the coin information of one special coin located on the standby member 470 by the payout IC tag reader 501. Although configured to discriminate the type, a plurality of standby members corresponding to the payout order are provided, the coin information of each privilege coin C accommodated in the plurality of standby members is individually read by the IC tag reader, and paid out after the next time. It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines beforehand the kind of privilege coin C in order of payment.

  Similarly, in the second and third embodiments, one privilege card CA to be discharged next time is transferred to the confirmation position of the privilege card discharge device 1450 and the card information is read. Based on the code pattern read by the discharge card reader 1453, the card CA is transferred to the confirmation position as a privilege card to be discharged next time, and a plurality of privilege cards CA are loaded in the card information reader 1300. The card information of each privilege card CA may be obtained.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as a device for paying out the special coins C, one special coin is obtained from the storage member 460 that stores various types of special coins C regardless of the type of the special coins C. C is supplied to the standby member 470, and the coin information of the privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 is read by the payout IC tag reader 501, thereby determining the type of the privilege coin C to be paid out next time.

  Instead of this, a plurality of storage units may be provided for each type of privilege coin C, and one storage unit for paying out may be selected from the plurality of storage units when the grant condition is satisfied. In the case of adopting such a configuration, since the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time is determined by selecting the storage unit, the reading for individually detecting the type of special coin C (content of coin information) is performed. The apparatus (IC tag reader for payout 501) can be dispensed with.

  Note that by determining in advance the selection order of one storage unit to be paid out, the type of privilege coin C to be paid out after the next time can be determined in advance in the payout order. Note that the selection order of the storage units may be determined by lottery or the like.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the coin information of one privilege coin C located on the standby member 470 is read by the payout IC tag reader 501, but the standby member 470 is not provided (that is, the storage member) 460 only). For example, the coin information of the privilege coin C is made information that can be detected by an optical reading device, a transparent window capable of reading coin information is provided on the discharge side of the storage member, and the standby member 470 is not provided next time. It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines the kind of privilege coin C paid out.

  In the first embodiment, the coin information reading device 300 is formed with the concave coin receiving portion 300a, and the privilege coin C can be removably attached to the coin receiving portion 300a. . Instead of this, the coin information reading device 300 may be configured such that the privilege coin C is simply placed (arranged) on the plate-like portion without providing the concave portion like the coin receiving portion 300a. Similarly, instead of the card information reading device 1300 in the second and third embodiments, the privilege card CA may be simply placed (placed) at a position readable by the pattern reading means on the plate-like portion. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the coin information reading device 300 or the card information reading device 1300 is provided integrally with the pachinko machine 10, but the coin information reading device 300 or the card information reading device 1300 is the pachinko machine 10. It is good also as a structure which makes it a separate body and connects to the pachinko machine 10, and uses it.

  In the first embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 receives the coin information read by the payout IC tag reader 501 and the main control device 110. Based on the commands (variation pattern command, stop symbol command), the type of bonus coin C to be paid out next time is suggested.

  Instead, the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the main control device 110, and the main control device 110 determines the coin information read by the payout IC tag reader 501 and the establishment of the suggestion condition in the main control device 110. When the suggestion condition is satisfied, a corresponding command may be output to the sound lamp control device 113. At this time, for example, in the variation start process (see FIG. 14) executed by the main control device 110, when a complete deviation is continuously determined as the variation pattern a predetermined number of times, or the probability variation jackpot is set as the display mode. It can be determined that the suggestion condition is satisfied.

  Here, when the IC tag reader for payout 501 is connected to the main control device 110 and the main control device 110 determines whether to suggest the type of the special coin C to be paid out next time, The coin supply solenoid 464 and the coin payout solenoid 472 of the coin payout device 450 are connected to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 determines whether the grant condition is met, and when the grant condition is met, the corresponding command is sounded. It is good also as a structure output to the lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. At this time, for example, in the variation start process (see FIG. 14) executed by the main controller 110, when the probability variation jackpot is set as the display mode, it can be determined that the provision condition is satisfied.

  Alternatively, the payout IC tag reader 501 is connected to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the coin information read by the payout IC tag reader 501 and the command received from the sound lamp control device 114 (display variation pattern command, The display of the type of privilege coin C to be paid out next time may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display symbol command for display). Further, the coin supply solenoid 464 and the coin payout solenoid 472 of the privilege coin payout device 450 may be configured to be connected to the display control device 140.

  In the first embodiment, the receiving part IC tag reader 302 and the coin effect button 301 of the coin information reading device 300 are connected to the sound lamp control device 113, but these are connected to the main control device 110, It is good also as a structure which outputs the coin information of the privilege coin C read by the IC tag reader 302 for receiving parts to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. Further, the receiving part IC tag reader 302 and the coin effect button 301 of the coin information reading device 300 may be connected to the display control device 114.

  In the first embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. However, the command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

  In the second and third embodiments, the discharge card reader 1453, the receiving unit card reader 1303, the presence / absence detection sensor 1461, and the read button 1301 are connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and are sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Although the configuration is such that information and signals are input, at least one of these configurations may be configured to be connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 and input information or signals to the connected control device. .

  Here, when the discharge card reader 1453 or the like is connected to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 performs processing according to the input information or signal, and the resulting command (privilege card CA). A command for instructing the discharge of the sound and a command for instructing an effect as a privilege) may be output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, information and signals input from the discharge card reader 1453 and the like to the main control device 110 are output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the same processing as in the second and third embodiments is executed by the sound lamp control device 113. It is good also as composition to do.

  Alternatively, when a discharge card reader 1453 or the like is connected to the display control device 114, processing corresponding to the input information or signal is performed by the display control device 114, and the privilege card CA is displayed by the display control device 114. It can be configured to execute the effect display as a discharge or privilege.

  In the second and third embodiments, the transfer motor 1451c and the mounting solenoid 1304 are connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and driven and controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. At least one configuration may be configured to be connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 and to be driven and controlled by a connection destination control device.

  The characteristic configuration included in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration included in the pachinko machine 10A of the second embodiment, and the characteristic configuration included in the pachinko machine 10B of the third embodiment. Naturally, it is possible to obtain a gaming machine in which the configurations are combined as necessary.

  For example, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has a characteristic configuration in which (A) suggests or notifies information on a special value medium (privilege coin C) to be paid out next time when a predetermined suggestion condition is satisfied. The pachinko machine 10B according to the third embodiment has (B) a characteristic that the grant condition of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time is changed according to the information of the privilege card CA to be discharged next time. Although having a configuration, it is naturally possible to obtain a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having the characteristic configurations (A) and (B) from these embodiments.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as other game machines such as alepatchi and sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives the player a predetermined game value is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown.

  In a gaming machine that uses a game medium to play a game and pays out the game medium as a game value when the game state of the game satisfies a predetermined payout condition, the game state satisfies a predetermined special value provision condition A special value providing means for providing a special value different from the gaming value, and a value determining means for determining the type of the special value at least for the special value to be provided next time by the special value providing means. And a value presenting means for suggesting or notifying the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value granting means based on the discrimination by the value discriminating means when the gaming state satisfies a predetermined suggestion condition. A gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in a game using a game medium, when the game state satisfies a predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out as a game value, while the game state satisfies a predetermined special value provision condition. Then, a special value different from the game value is given by the special value giving means.

  Here, when the special value is given at least next time by the special value granting means, the type of the special value is discriminated by the value discriminating means, and based on the discrimination, the gaming state satisfies a predetermined suggestion condition The type of special value assigned next time by the special value providing means is suggested or notified by the value presenting means.

  Therefore, when a certain gaming state (a gaming state satisfying the suggestion state), the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the value presenting means, so that the player has a special value before acquiring the special value. You can continue playing with the expectation that you may be able to win.

  In particular, if the type of special value given or notified next time by the value presentation means is something that the player himself is eager to acquire, the player waits for the acquisition of the special value. You can continue playing.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine A1, since the type of special value to be given next time is suggested or notified by the value presenting means, a new gameability is created, which becomes a new added value, Allows the player to maintain interest for a longer period of time.

  In the gaming machine A1, the “suggestion condition” that is an opportunity to suggest or notify the type of special value to be given next time is the same condition as the “special value provision condition” that is an opportunity to grant special value. May be under different conditions. Further, in the gaming machine A1, the form of the special value provided by the special value providing means may be a tangible form such as a medium or an intangible form such as data.

  In the above embodiment, the special value providing means in the gaming machine A1 corresponds to the processing of S2404 in the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22) and the coin payout process (see FIG. 27). In the above embodiment, the payout coin detection process (see FIG. 29) corresponds to the value determination means in the gaming machine A1. In the above embodiment, the value presenting means in the gaming machine A1 includes the processing in S2405 of the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22), the processing in S2504 of the complete outcounting process (see FIG. 23), and the variation effect setting process ( The process of S2605 in FIG. 24), the process of S2707 in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 25), and the processes of S2804 and S2807 in the stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 26) are applicable.

  In the gaming machine A1, a display device capable of displaying a dynamic display using identification information, passage detection means provided at a predetermined location for detecting passage of a game medium, and the game medium by the passage detection means On the basis of the fact that the display device has detected the dynamic display start means for starting the dynamic display using the identification information, and the suggestion condition is the detection of the game medium by the passage detection means A gaming machine A2 that is based on the conditions.

  According to the gaming machine A2, when a game medium that has passed a predetermined location is detected by the passage detection means, dynamic display using the identification information is started by the dynamic display start means on the display device. At this time, the condition based on the detection of the game medium by the passage detection means is the suggestion condition that triggers the suggestion or notification by the value presentation means. Therefore, the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time is performed along with the dynamic display using the identification information performed on the display device.

  By the way, in the conventional general gaming machine, the dynamic display (variation display) of the identification information on the display device is started on the condition that the game medium has passed a predetermined location, and the identification information is predetermined. However, according to the gaming machine A2, an indication or notification of the type of special value to be given next time is displayed on the display device. Since it is performed along with the dynamic display using the identification information to be performed, not only the sense of expectation for the success / failure result that the stop display similar to the conventional general gaming machine brings to the player who visually recognizes the dynamic display, It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a special value may not be obtained in a conventional general gaming machine.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine A2, the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time is performed along with the dynamic display using the identification information performed on the display device. Compared to general gaming machines, there are abundant changes (variations) in gaming properties, and as a result, it is possible to keep the player interested in gaming for a longer period of time.

  In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine A2. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 1st entrance switch provided in the 1st entrance 64 corresponds as a passage detection means in game machine A2. Further, in the above embodiment, the dynamic display start means in the gaming machine A2 corresponds to the process of S2308 of the change display start process (see FIG. 14) and the decorative symbol change display process (see FIG. 21).

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a player is provided at a predetermined location and detects the passage of the game medium, and the player from the normal state based on the detection of the game medium by the passage detection means. A profit lottery means for drawing whether or not to generate an advantageous state advantageous to the game machine, wherein the suggestion condition is a condition based on a result of at least one lottery performed by the profit lottery means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, whether or not to generate an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state based on the passage detection means detecting that the game medium has passed a predetermined location. The lottery is performed by the profit lottery means. At this time, a condition based on at least one lottery result performed by the profit lottery means is set as a suggestion condition that triggers the suggestion or notification by the value presenting means.

  Therefore, since the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time will be made according to the lottery result, it will be given to the gameability by lottery provided by conventional general gaming machines next time. A new game characteristic is added by suggesting or informing the kind of special value to be played, and as a result, it becomes possible to maintain the interest in the game for a longer period of time.

  Generally, if a result indicating that an advantageous state is not generated is obtained frequently (for example, a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period), the player tends to lose interest in the game. . Here, for example, by setting as a suggestion condition that the result that the advantageous state is not generated is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more, the result that the advantageous state is not generated is obtained at a predetermined frequency or more. Even if it is about to lose, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the acquisition of special value by suggesting or informing the type of special value to be given next time. Can be maintained.

  Alternatively, by setting as a suggestion condition that the result of generating the advantageous state is obtained, the special value is suggested or notified together with the occurrence of the advantageous state. A new game is added to the game by the lottery that has been provided, and the interest of the game is improved, allowing the player to maintain interest in the game for a long time.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 1st entrance switch provided in the 1st entrance 64 corresponds as a passage detection means in gaming machine A3. In the above embodiment, the start winning process (see FIG. 16) corresponds to the profit lottery means in the gaming machine A3.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, provided with a passage detecting means provided at a predetermined location and detecting the passage of the game medium, based on the fact that the game medium is detected by the passage detection means, Profit lottery means for lottering whether or not to generate an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and the suggestion condition is obtained when the profit lottery means continuously obtains a result that does not cause the advantageous state for a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A4 that satisfies the requirements.

  According to the gaming machine A4, when the passage detecting means detects that the game medium has passed through a predetermined location, an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is generated based on the detection. A lottery of whether or not is performed by profit lottery means. At this time, the presenting means is configured as a condition that is satisfied when the profit lottery means continuously obtains a result that does not generate an advantageous state a predetermined number of times.

  In general, the player tends to lose interest in the game if the advantageous state does not occur. However, according to the gaming machine A4, the suggestion condition is satisfied by the result that the advantageous state is not generated in the lottery by the lottery means for a predetermined number of times, and as a result, the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time is satisfied. Therefore, the range of game play is increased as compared with the conventional general gaming machine, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 1st entrance switch provided in the 1st entrance 64 corresponds as a passage detection means in gaming machine A4. In the above embodiment, the start winning process (see FIG. 16) corresponds to the profit lottery means in the gaming machine A4.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a display device capable of displaying dynamic display and stop display using identification information and a dynamic display mode using the identification information displayed by the display device are selected. The dynamic display mode based on the fact that the game medium is detected by the target display mode selection unit, the passage detection unit which is provided at a predetermined location and detects the passage of the game medium, and the passage detection unit detects the passage of the game medium. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination following the dynamic display starting means for starting the dynamic display of the mode set by the selecting means and the dynamic display started by the dynamic display starting means. And an advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and the value presenting means is characterized by the special value giving means after the suggestion condition is satisfied. If a mode that denies the generation of an advantageous state by the advantageous state generating unit is selected by the dynamic display mode selecting unit before value is added, the special value adding unit assigns the next time. A combination of the identification information configured as a specific combination different from the combination in which the advantageous state is generated by the advantageous state generating means, and including the identification information corresponding to the type of the special value. A gaming machine A5 that suggests or notifies the type of the special value to be provided next time by the special value providing means by displaying the stop.

  According to the gaming machine A5, when the passage detection means detects that the game medium has passed a predetermined location, the dynamic display start means uses the identification information based on the detection. The display is started on the display device. At this time, the dynamic display started by the dynamic display start unit is the dynamic display of the set mode set by the dynamic display mode selection unit. Thereafter, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is generated by the advantageous state generating means.

  When the suggestion condition is satisfied, the value presenting means suggests or reports the type of special value to be assigned next time by the special value providing means. Here, according to the gaming machine A5, a mode in which the occurrence of an advantageous state by the advantageous state generating unit is denied after the suggestion condition is satisfied and before the special value is provided by the special value providing unit. A combination that includes identification information corresponding to the type of special value to be assigned next time by the special value assigning means and generates an advantageous state by the advantageous state generating means. The combination of identification information configured as different specific combinations is stopped and displayed on the display device, thereby suggesting or notifying the type of special value to be assigned next time by the special value providing means.

  Generally, the dynamic display of the mode that denies the occurrence of the advantageous state cannot be expected to generate the advantageous state, so if the dynamic display of such a mode continues, the player tends to lose interest in the game It is in. However, according to the gaming machine A5, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the next time by the stop display following the dynamic display of the mode in which the occurrence of the advantageous state is denied until the special value is given next by the special value providing means. Since the type of special value to be given is suggested or notified, the range of game play is increased compared to conventional general gaming machines, and as a result, the interest in the game is increased over the long term. It is possible to make it maintain.

  Also, as a stop display that suggests or notifies the type of special value to be given next time, it is not a combination that generates an advantageous state by the advantageous state generating means, Since a specific combination including the corresponding identification information is displayed, it is possible to expect the player to acquire special value by the appearance of a specific stop display. It is possible to maintain the player over time.

  In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine A5. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 1st entrance switch provided in the 1st entrance 64 corresponds as a passage detection means in gaming machine A5. In the above embodiment, the dynamic display mode selection means in the gaming machine A5 corresponds to a change start process (see FIG. 14) and a change effect setting process (see FIG. 23). In the above embodiment, the dynamic display start means in the gaming machine A5 corresponds to the process in S2308 of the decorative symbol variation display process (see FIG. 21).

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a display device capable of displaying dynamic display and stop display using identification information, and when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the special value is added next time Setting means for setting a dynamic display mode for suggesting the type of the special value, and the value presenting unit displays the dynamic display mode set by the setting unit when the suggestion condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A6 that suggests or notifies the type of the special value to be provided next time by the special value providing means by dynamically displaying on the display device.

  According to the gaming machine A6, when the suggestion condition is satisfied, the value display means sets a dynamic display mode that suggests the type of the special value to be assigned next time by the setting means by the setting means. The value presenting means suggests or reports the type of special value to be given next time by the special value giving means. Here, according to the gaming machine A6, by dynamically displaying the dynamic display mode set by the setting unit on the display device, the type of the special value to be added next time is suggested or notified by the special value providing unit. The

  Therefore, since the suggestion or notification of the type of special value to be given next time is performed using dynamic display, the range of gaming is increased as compared with conventional general gaming machines. It makes it possible to keep the player interested in

  In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the display device in the gaming machine A6. In the above embodiment, the setting unit in the gaming machine A6 corresponds to the process of S2605 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 23).

  In the gaming machine A6, provided with an advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination following the dynamic display by the display device, The setting means includes identification information corresponding to the type of the special value to be assigned next time by the special value giving means and a combination of identification information for generating the advantageous state by the advantageous state generating means. A gaming machine A7 that sets an expected mode in which a part is stopped in the middle of dynamic display as a dynamic display mode that suggests the type of the special value to be given next time by the special value granting unit.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the dynamic display mode set by the setting unit as the dynamic display mode that suggests the type of special value to be given next time by the special value providing unit is an expected mode in which the occurrence of an advantageous state is expected. Therefore, the range of game play is increased as compared with conventional general gaming machines, and as a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the special value given by the special value giving means is a gaming machine A8 configured in the form of a second medium having the special value.

  According to the gaming machine A8, since the special value provided by the special value providing means is configured in the form of the second medium having the special value, it is easy to handle the special value. In the above embodiment, the privilege coin C corresponds to the second medium in the gaming machine A8.

  In the gaming machine A8, a storage unit that stores a plurality of the second media regardless of the type of special value that each of the second media has, and a standby unit that is separated from the storage unit and waits for the second medium The special value providing means includes a transfer means for transferring the second medium stored in the storage means from the storage means to the standby means, and the second medium transferred to the standby means by the transfer means. A game machine A9 that includes a payout executing means for paying out a medium, and the value determining means determines the type of special value of the second medium for the second medium located in the standby means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the second medium having the special value is stored in the storage unit, and the transfer unit (one of the special value providing unit) is transferred from the storage unit to the standby unit separated from the storage unit. Part). The second medium transferred to the waiting means is waited by the waiting means until paid out by the payout executing means (part of the special value providing means). And the kind of special value which the 2nd medium located in a standby means has is discriminate | determined by a value discrimination means.

  Here, the storage means stores a plurality of (a plurality of, a plurality of) second media regardless of the type of special value possessed by each second medium. (For example, when a manager of a hall in which a gaming machine capable of paying out the second medium is installed), when each of the second media is stored in the storage means, each second medium is a kind of special value. Therefore, it is not necessary to sort according to the load, and the load on the management of the second medium can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the standby means is provided at a position separated from the storage means, it is possible to prevent the special value type from being determined by the value determination means for the second medium stored in the storage means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine at least the special value of the second medium that is waited for by the standby means and is paid out next time, so that the special value of the second medium that is paid out next time is surely suggested after the suggestion condition is satisfied. Or it can be notified.

  In the above embodiment, the storage member 460 corresponds to the storage means in the gaming machine A9. In the above embodiment, the standby member 470 corresponds to the standby unit in the gaming machine A9. Moreover, in the said embodiment, as a transfer means in gaming machine A9, it corresponds to the branch process to Yes of S2908 in the coin payout process (refer FIG. 27), and the process of S2909-S2913. In the above embodiment, the payout execution means in the gaming machine A9 corresponds to the branching process to S2901 Yes in the coin payout process (see FIG. 27) and the processes from S2902 to S2907.

  In the gaming machine A9, the standby means is configured to wait for one second medium.

  According to the gaming machine A10, since the waiting means is configured to wait for one second medium, the special value possessed by the second medium to be paid out next time can be reliably determined by the value determining means. The special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be reliably suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine A9 or A10 includes wireless reading means for reading information by wireless communication using a transmission medium, and the second medium includes storage means for storing information as a special value possessed by the second medium. And the value determination means reads the information as the special value stored in the storage means of the second medium located in the standby means by the wireless reading means, and based on the read information as the special value And determining the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby means, and the storage means from a material that prevents the transmission medium from being transmitted to the second medium stored in the second medium. A configured gaming machine A11.

  According to the gaming machine A11, the discrimination of the type of special value by the value discriminating means is performed by transmitting information as a special value stored in the storage means of the second medium with respect to the second medium located in the standby means. The data is read by wireless reading means by wireless communication using and is performed based on the read information.

  Here, since the storage means is made of a material that prevents the transmission medium from being transmitted to the second medium stored in the storage means, the storage means can determine the type of special value by the value determination means. It is possible to effectively prevent the second medium stored in

  Therefore, at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out at the next time can be reliably determined, so that the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be reliably suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied. .

  In the above embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 corresponds to the wireless reading means in the gaming machine A11. In the above embodiment, the IC tag 602 (more specifically, information provided in the IC tag 602 can be stored in a nonvolatile manner and cannot be rewritten) is used as a storage unit in the gaming machine A11. Applicable.

  The gaming machine A9 or A10 includes optical detection means for optically detecting information held by the object, and the second medium is information corresponding to information as a special value of the second medium and is optical. Medium value which is information that can be detected by the detection means, and the value determination means detects the medium information of the second medium located in the waiting means by the optical detection means. A gaming machine A12 that determines the type of special value of the second medium located in the standby means based on the medium information.

  According to the gaming machine A12, the type of special value is determined by the value determining means by detecting the medium information of the second medium located in the waiting means by an optical detecting means (for example, an optical sensor, a barcode reader, etc.). And based on the detected medium information. Therefore, at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out at the next time can be reliably determined, so that the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be reliably suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied. .

  The gaming machine A9 or A10 includes shape recognition means for recognizing the shape of an object, and the second medium is configured in a shape corresponding to information as a special value of the second medium, The value discriminating unit recognizes the shape of the second medium located in the standby unit by the shape recognition unit, and discriminates the type of special value possessed by the second medium located in the standby unit based on the recognized shape. A gaming machine A13.

  According to the gaming machine A13, the determination of the type of special value by the value determination unit is performed by using the shape recognition unit (for example, imaging data (image) of the target object) as the shape of the second medium located in the standby unit. Recognition by a recognition device or the like) and is performed based on the recognized shape. Therefore, at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out at the next time can be reliably determined, so that the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time can be reliably suggested or notified after the suggestion condition is satisfied. .

  In the gaming machine A8, the gaming machine A8 includes a plurality of storage units that store the second medium for each type of special value that the second medium has, and the special value providing unit includes the second storage unit among the plurality of storage units. Selecting means for selecting one storage means for paying out the medium; and a payout executing means for paying out the second medium stored in the storage means selected by the selection means, A gaming machine A14 that determines the type of the special value before being given by the special value granting unit based on the selection of the storage unit by the selection unit.

  According to the gaming machine A14, a plurality of storage means are provided for each type of special value possessed by the second medium, and one corresponding to the second medium paid out by the selection means (part of the special value provision means). The storage means is selected, and the second medium stored in the selected storage means is paid out by the payout executing means.

  Here, the discrimination of the type of special value by the value discrimination means is performed based on the selection of the storage means by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to determine at least the special value of the second medium to be paid out next time without requiring a means for detecting the identification information of each second medium.

  In any one of the gaming machines A8 to A14, the value of detecting the special value of the second medium with respect to the medium arranging means capable of detachably arranging the second medium and the second medium arranged in the arranging means. A gaming machine A15 comprising detection means and special effect execution means for performing a special effect corresponding to the special value of the second medium detected by the value detection means during a game using the game medium.

  According to the gaming machine A15, there is provided medium arranging means capable of detachably arranging the second medium, and the special value of the second medium is value detecting means for the second medium arranged in the medium arranging means. The special effect according to the detected special value is performed by the special effect executing means during the game using the game medium.

  Therefore, the player can have a high interest in the game by the new gameability that can be experienced using the second medium. In addition, the player's interest will be directed to acquiring a second medium in which a new game experience can be experienced. In this respect, the game performance is improved. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period.

  In the above embodiment, the coin information reading device 300 (coin receiving unit 300a) corresponds to the medium mounting means in the gaming machine A15. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the IC tag reader 302 for receiving parts corresponds as a value detection means in game machine A15. Moreover, in the said embodiment, as special effect execution means in game machine A15, the process of S2607 of a receiving part coin detection process (refer FIG. 30), a change effect setting process (refer FIG. 24), and a stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25)).

  A gaming machine A16 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine A17 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when the game state of the game satisfies a predetermined payout condition, the game value and the game value A special value medium providing means for providing special value media having different special values, an initial position where a plurality of the special value media are stored, and a confirmation position provided apart from the initial position And a transfer means for transferring one special value medium to be provided next time by the special value medium providing means from the initial position to the confirmation position among the plurality of special value media located at the initial position in the storage means. And a value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value possessed by the special value medium located at the confirmation position.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, while a special value different from the game value is satisfied when a predetermined special value is added. Is provided by special value providing means.

  Here, a plurality of special value media are stored at an initial position in the storage means, and one of the plurality of special value media located at the initial position is provided next time by the special value medium providing means. The special value medium is transferred by the transfer means to a confirmation position provided at a distance from the initial position in the storage means, and at this confirmation position, the content of the special value possessed by one special value medium to be given next time is stored. It is detected by the value content detection means.

  Therefore, since the content of the special value possessed by one special value medium to be given next time is detected, it is possible to add value to the game using the detected content. For example, by changing the special value granting conditions of the special value medium according to the contents of the detected special value, it is possible to change the grant frequency of the special value medium. Can do. Or, by giving the player the detected special value (that is, the special value possessed by the special value medium to be assigned next time) according to the content of the detected special value before giving the special value medium. The player can continue the game with a sense of expectation that a special value medium may be obtained.

  In this way, according to the gaming machine B1, since the special value content of the one special value medium to be given next time is detected, it is possible to add value to the game using the detected content. . As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

  Further, according to the gaming machine B1, the special value content of one special value medium to be given next time is detected at a confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. For example, even when the special value content of the special value medium to be given next time is detected using a transmission medium such as electromagnetic waves, it is confused with the special value content of other special value media. It is possible to prevent false detection due to.

  Alternatively, for example, when a light transmissive region is provided in a predetermined region of each special value medium and a pattern indicating the content of special value is formed in the light transmissive region, the light transmissive region on which the pattern is formed is If the special value medium is adjacent in the position, even if it tries to detect the pattern of the light transmissive area in the initial position, it will be detected as a pattern in which the special value each adjacent special value medium has, There arises a problem that it becomes difficult to detect only the contents of the special value of one special value medium to be given next time.

  Such a problem is that each special value medium is placed (lever arrangement) so that each light transmissive area in the adjacent special value medium is on the alternate side, and the pattern of the light transmissive area located on each side can be detected individually. However, it is possible to solve this problem by providing a number of detection means in two places. However, a plurality of detection means (in this case, two places) are required, and the manufacturing cost is increased and one of the two detection means is used. Control for detecting the pattern of the light transmissive region is also complicated. Furthermore, an administrator who manages a special value medium (for example, a manager of a hall in which a gaming machine capable of providing a special value medium) or a manufacturer of the special value medium stores the special value medium in the storage means. In addition, it is necessary to rearrange the direction of the special value medium so that each special value medium is leveraged, and the load on handling the special value medium is high.

  However, according to the gaming machine B1, the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Even if each special value medium is not arranged in a lever, it is possible to create a state in which the light transmissive area of the special value medium to be applied next time does not overlap with the light transmissive area of the adjacent special value medium. Therefore, the special value content of the special value medium to be given next time can be detected by one detection means, and the load on handling of the special value medium is also suppressed.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine B1, the content of the special value of the one special value medium to be given next time is detected at the confirmation position separated from the initial position where the other special value medium is stored. Therefore, it is possible to suitably detect the content of the special value that the special value medium to be given next time has.

  In the above embodiment, as the special value medium providing means in the gaming machine B1, S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (see FIGS. 48 and 61), S4406 in the outreach discharge mode process (see FIG. 62), This corresponds to the processing of S4410 and the processing of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 49). In the first embodiment, the special value medium providing means in the gaming machine B1 corresponds to the process in S2404 in the coin payout setting process (see FIG. 22).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the storage member 1451 corresponds as a storage means in game machine B1. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the privilege coin payout apparatus 450 corresponds as a storage means in gaming machine B1.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S4205-S4207 in a card discharge | emission process (refer FIG. 49) corresponds to a transfer means in game machine B1. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S2908-S2913 in a coin payout process (refer FIG. 27) corresponds as a transfer means in gaming machine B1.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the card reader 1453 for discharge corresponds as a value content detection means in gaming machine B1. In the above embodiment, the payout IC tag reader 501 corresponds to the value content detection means in the gaming machine B1.

  In the gaming machine B1, the special value medium is a medium having a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value. The detection means is configured to be able to read the pattern, and a reading assist surface is disposed on the opposite side of the light transmissive region in the special value medium located at the confirmation position with respect to the value content detection means. A gaming machine B2 which is characterized by being made.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the special value medium has a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value. The special value content is detected by reading the pattern formed in the area by the value content detection means.

  Here, since the reading auxiliary surface is arranged on the opposite side of the light transmissive area in the special value medium located at the confirmation position with respect to the value content detection means, the value formed on the light transmissive area is detected. When read by means, the pattern can be read reliably. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the contents of the special value that the special value medium to be given next time has.

  An example of the reading assist surface is a non-ground surface. Here, when the reading assist surface is configured as a non-ground surface, it is preferable that the non-ground surface has a color that does not hinder pattern reading. For example, when the pattern color is black or dark (for example, dark green or dark blue), the reading assist surface is white or light (for example, light yellow, cream, light pink or light blue). It is preferable to use a non-ground surface as a reading assist surface. Alternatively, when the color of the pattern is white or light, it is preferable that the reading assist surface is a black or dark non-ground surface as the reading assist surface.

  In the gaming machine B2, one side of the light-impermeable region in the special value medium is configured as the reading auxiliary surface, and the reading auxiliary surface is the value of the plurality of special value media stored in the initial position. A gaming machine B3, wherein the game machine B3 is superimposed so as to face the content detection means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the plurality of special value media stored in the initial position are superimposed with the reading assist surface, which is a light-impermeable area, facing toward the value content detection means (superimposed). ) Therefore, the reading assist surface in the special value medium located in the initial position is provided on the opposite side to the value content detecting means of the light transmissive region in the special value medium located in the confirmation position (that is, the special value medium given next time). Can be positioned.

  Therefore, when the pattern formed in the light transmissive region is read by the value content detection means, the pattern can be read reliably. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the contents of the special value that the special value medium to be given next time has.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, one side of the light-impermeable region in the special value medium is configured as the reading auxiliary surface, and a plurality of special value media stored in the initial position include the reading auxiliary surface. The distance from the initial position to the confirmation position of the special value medium is superimposed on the side facing the value content detection means, and the distance from the initial position to the confirmation position in the light transmissive region And a shorter length than the length in the direction from the initial position to the confirmation position in the light-impermeable area on the confirmation position side of the light-transmissive area. B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the plurality of special value media stored in the initial position are superimposed with the reading assist surface, which is a light-impermeable area, facing toward the value content detection means. Further, the distance from the initial position to the confirmation position of the special value medium is longer than the length in the direction from the initial position to the confirmation position in the light transmissive area, and the light impermeable area on the confirmation position side of the light transmissive area. It is configured to be shorter than the length in the direction from the initial position to the confirmation position.

  Therefore, when the special value medium provided next time is transferred from the initial position to the confirmation position, the value content of the light-transmitting region in the special value medium located at the confirmation position (that is, the special value medium provided next time). On the opposite side to the detection means, the reading assist surface in the special value medium located at the initial position is located.

  Therefore, when the pattern formed in the light transmissive region is read by the value content detection means, the pattern can be read reliably. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the contents of the special value that the special value medium to be given next time has.

  In addition, since the light-impermeable area of the special value medium located at the initial position is used as a background when the pattern formed in the light-transmissive area is read by the value content detection means, it is between the initial position and the confirmation position. Can be kept to a relatively short distance. As a result, the entire apparatus for applying the special value medium can be configured in a space-saving manner.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the light transmissive region is formed by being deflected toward a peripheral side of the special value medium.

  According to the gaming machine B5, since the light transmissive region in the special value medium is formed by being deflected toward the peripheral side of the special value medium, the light transmissive region can be widened. Therefore, in the case where the light-impermeable area of the special value medium located at the initial position is used as a background when the pattern formed in the light-transmissive area is read by the value content detection means, the light of the adjacent special value medium It is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the special value content of one special value medium to be given next time by overlapping the transparent regions.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, an arrangement unit capable of arranging a plurality of the special value media, and a pattern reading unit that reads a pattern of the light transmissive region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement unit And a display device capable of displaying dynamic display and stop display using identification information, and a display mode of the dynamic display and / or stop display is selected based on the pattern read by the pattern reading unit A gaming machine B6 comprising a display mode selection means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, when the pattern reading unit reads the pattern of the light transmissive region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement unit, the motion displayed on the display device is based on the read pattern. The display mode is selected by the display selection means.

  Therefore, the player arranges a plurality of special value media acquired in advance in the arrangement means, and thereby dynamic display and / or stop display of the display mode according to the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means. Can be displayed on the display device. Thereby, the gameability is improved, and the player can have high interest in the game. Also, the player's interest is directed to acquiring a special value medium that leads to an improvement in game playability. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period.

  In the above embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arrangement means in the gaming machine B6. In the above embodiment, the receiving unit card reader 1303 corresponds to the pattern reading means in the gaming machine B6. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 corresponds as a display apparatus in game machine B6. Moreover, in the said embodiment, as a display mode selection means in gaming machine B6, S4002-S4006 in the processing of S2623, S2626-S2631 in a variation production setting process (refer FIG. 46), and a jackpot production setting process (refer FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds.

  In the gaming machine B6, the display mode selection means includes one dynamic display and / or one set consisting of a combination of predetermined special value media among the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means. Alternatively, a gaming machine B7, wherein a display mode of the stop display is selected.

  According to the gaming machine B7, when there is one set consisting of a combination of predetermined special value media among a plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means, one dynamic display and The display mode of the stop display is set by the display mode selection unit.

  Therefore, since the display mode of one dynamic display and / or stop display can be made to appear as a privilege by combining a plurality of special value media, in a game in which a special value medium is granted by establishment of special value grant conditions It is possible to add value to acquiring a plurality of special value media. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the acquisition of a large number of privilege cards CA, and as a result, the player's interest in the game can be maintained for a long time.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, an installation unit capable of arranging one or a plurality of the special value media, and a pattern of the light transmissive region in the one special value medium arranged in the arrangement unit, or Pattern reading means for reading a pattern formed by a combination of the patterns of the light transmissive regions in the plurality of special value media, and analysis means for analyzing the content of the game value included in the pattern read by the pattern reading means A display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display using identification information, and a display mode of the dynamic display and / or the stop display based on the content of the game value analyzed by the analysis means And a display mode selection means for selecting the game machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, when one or a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arrangement unit, the pattern of the light-transmitting area in the one special value medium arranged in the arrangement unit or the plurality of special values A pattern formed by a combination of patterns of light transmissive regions on the medium is read by the pattern reading means, and the contents of the game value included in the read pattern are analyzed by the analyzing means. Then, based on the contents of the game value analyzed by the analysis means, the display mode of the dynamic display and / or stop display displayed on the display device is selected by the display selection means.

  Therefore, the player arranges the special value medium acquired in advance on the arrangement means, and displays the dynamic display and / or stop display of the display mode corresponding to each special value medium arranged on the arrangement means on the display device. Can be displayed. Thereby, the gameability is improved, and the player can have high interest in the game.

  In particular, when a plurality of special value media are arranged on the arrangement means, the contents of the game value included in the pattern formed by the combination of the light transmissive region patterns in the plurality of special value media are analyzed. The display mode of the dynamic display and / or stop display displayed on the display device is selected by the display selection means.

  Therefore, the dynamic display and / or stop display of the display mode according to the number of special value media arranged in the arrangement unit can be displayed on the display device. Accordingly, the player's interest is also directed to acquiring a special value medium that leads to an improvement in game playability. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period.

  In the above embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arrangement means in the gaming machine B8. In the above embodiment, the receiving unit card reader 1303 corresponds to the pattern reading means in the gaming machine B8. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S3605-S3612 in a receiving part card reading process (refer FIG. 54) corresponds as an analysis means in game machine B8.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 corresponds as a display apparatus in game machine B8. Moreover, in the said embodiment, as a display mode selection means in gaming machine B8, S4002 to S4006 in the process of S2623, S2626-S2631 in a variation effect setting process (refer FIG. 46), and a jackpot effect setting process (refer FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds.

  In any one of the gaming machines B6 to B8, the pattern formed in the light transmissive region of the special value medium includes a common pattern regardless of the content of the gaming value, and the special value medium The common pattern formed in the light-transmitting region is formed at a position where the reading result by the pattern reading unit differs depending on which surface of the special value medium is directed to the pattern reading unit. A gaming machine B9, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B9, the pattern formed in the light transmissive region of the special value medium includes a common pattern regardless of the contents of the game value, and the common pattern is stored in the pattern reading means. On the other hand, the reading result by the pattern reading means is formed at different positions depending on which side of the special value medium is directed.

  Therefore, it is possible to clearly determine the surface to be properly directed to the pattern reading means in the special value medium. As a result, it is possible to prevent a result different from the result that should appear originally by directing the surface opposite to the surface that should be normally directed to the pattern reading means, and to maintain the fairness of each player. .

  In any one of the gaming machines B6 to B9, the disposing unit inserts one or a plurality of the special value medium, and the special value that is input after the special value medium is input to the input port In order to arrange the medium in an aligned manner, the medium includes an aligning unit that presses the special value medium loaded into the slot from one side, and the aligning unit corresponds to a pattern reading unit in the pattern reading unit. A pressing surface that is provided at a position and presses the special value medium, and the pressing surface is configured to have a width that covers at least a pattern reading unit in the pattern reading unit, and reads the pattern. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that an area covering the portion is configured as at least a reading assist surface.

  According to the gaming machine B10, after one or a plurality of special value media are input to the input port, the special value medium input to the input port is pressed from one side by the aligning means, whereby the special value medium is Arranged in an aligned state. At this time, the special value medium is aligned by the aligning unit by pressing with a pressing surface provided at a position corresponding to the pattern reading unit in the pattern reading unit.

  Here, the pressing surface is configured to have a size that covers at least the pattern reading unit in the pattern reading unit, and an area that covers the pattern reading unit is configured as at least a reading auxiliary surface, and thus is disposed on the arranging unit. In addition, the pattern of the light transmissive region in one or more special value media can be reliably read, and the dynamic display and / or stop display of the display mode according to the read pattern can be displayed on the display device. .

  In the above embodiment, the opening of the holder portion 1302a corresponds to the insertion port in the gaming machine B10. In the above embodiment, the mounting solenoid 1304 and the plate member 1305 correspond to the alignment means in the gaming machine B10.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the special value medium providing means exposes the special value medium located at the confirmation position, and at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the gaming machine by the transfer means. The game machine B11 is characterized in that the special value medium is given by being transferred to a predetermined discharge position.

  According to the gaming machine B11, the transfer of the special value medium from the initial position to the confirmation position and the transfer from the confirmation position to a predetermined discharge position where at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the gaming machine, Since it can be realized by a common transfer means, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the transfer means includes one drive means (for example, a transfer motor 1451c) that moves the position of the special value medium, and the initial position of the special game value medium by the drive means. The first transfer of the special value medium from the check position to the confirmation position is performed up to a position where the special value medium is not exposed to the outside of the gaming machine. The second transfer of the special value medium to be performed is performed to a predetermined discharge position where at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine B12, the transfer of the special value medium from the initial position to the confirmation position and the transfer from the confirmation position to a predetermined discharge position where at least a part of the special value medium is exposed to the outside of the gaming machine, Since it can be realized by one driving means, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Further, since the special value medium located at the initial position can be transferred to the confirmation position and the discharge position by one driving means, the special value medium is transferred from the initial position to the discharge position via the confirmation position. It is possible to prevent the mechanism from becoming complicated.

  In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when the game state of the game satisfies a predetermined payout condition, light impermeability is satisfied when the predetermined special value is added. Special value medium providing means for providing a special value medium having a region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the content of the special value different from the game value, and the special value medium An arrangement unit capable of arranging a plurality of special value media provided by the application unit, a pattern reading unit for reading a pattern of the light-transmitting region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement unit, and identification information A table of the dynamic display and / or the stop display based on the display device capable of displaying the used dynamic display and stop display and the pattern detected by the pattern reading means. Gaming machine B13, characterized in that a display mode selecting means for selecting a mode.

  According to the gaming machine B13, in a game using a game medium, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. On the other hand, a special value different from the game value is satisfied when a predetermined special value is added. Is provided by special value providing means. The special value medium provided at this time has a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the contents of the special value.

  Here, when a plurality of special value media are arranged in the arrangement unit, the pattern of the light transmissive region in the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement unit is read by the pattern reading unit, and the read pattern is obtained. Based on this, the display mode of the dynamic display and / or stop display displayed on the display device is selected by the display selection means.

  Therefore, the player arranges a plurality of special value media acquired in advance in the arrangement means, and thereby dynamic display and / or stop display of the display mode according to the plurality of special value media arranged in the arrangement means. Can be displayed on the display device. Thereby, the gameability is improved, and the player can have high interest in the game. Also, the player's interest is directed to acquiring a special value medium that leads to an improvement in game playability. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period.

  In the above embodiment, the special value medium providing means in the gaming machine B13 includes S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (see FIGS. 48 and 61), and S4406 in the outreach discharge mode process (see FIG. 62). This corresponds to the processing of S4410 and the processing of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 49).

  In the above embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arrangement means in the gaming machine B13. In the above embodiment, the receiving unit card reader 1303 corresponds to the pattern reading means in the gaming machine B13. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 corresponds as a display apparatus in game machine B13. Moreover, in the said embodiment, as a display mode selection means in game machine B13, S2623 in the fluctuation production | presentation setting process (refer FIG. 46), the process of S2626-S2631, and S4002-S4006 in the jackpot presentation setting process (refer FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds.

  In a gaming machine that plays a game using a game medium and gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, a light-impermeable area and a light-transmittable area when the predetermined special value-adding condition is satisfied And a special value medium providing means for providing a special value medium having a pattern formed in the light-transmitting region according to the content of the special value different from the game value, and the special value medium providing means Using arrangement means capable of arranging one or more of the special value media, pattern reading means for reading the pattern of the light transmissive region in the one or more special value media arranged in the arrangement means, and identification information A display device capable of displaying a dynamic display and a stop display; an analysis means for analyzing the content of the game value included in the pattern detected by the pattern reading means; Gaming machine B14, characterized in that based on the content of the game value analyzed by means, and a display mode selecting means for selecting a display mode of the dynamic display and / or the stop display.

  According to the gaming machine B14, a game value is given when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied in a game using a game medium. On the other hand, if a predetermined special value provision condition is satisfied, a special value different from the game value is obtained. Is provided by special value providing means. The special value medium provided at this time has a light impermeable region, a light transmissive region, and a pattern formed in the light transmissive region according to the contents of the special value.

  Here, when one or more special value media are arranged in the arrangement means, the pattern of the light transmissive region in the one or more special value media arranged in the arrangement means is read by the pattern reading means. The contents of the game value included in the set pattern are analyzed by the analyzing means. Then, based on the contents of the game value analyzed by the analysis means, the display mode of the dynamic display and / or stop display displayed on the display device is selected by the display selection means.

  Therefore, the player arranges the special value medium acquired in advance on the arrangement unit, thereby displaying the dynamic display and / or the stop display of the display mode corresponding to each special value medium arranged on the arrangement unit on the display device. Can be displayed. Thereby, the gameability is improved, and the player can have high interest in the game. Also, the player's interest is directed to acquiring a special value medium that leads to an improvement in game playability. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period.

  In the above embodiment, the special value medium providing means in the gaming machine B14 includes S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (see FIGS. 48 and 61), and S4406 in the outlier reach discharge mode process (see FIG. 62). This corresponds to the processing of S4410 and the processing of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the card ejection processing (see FIG. 49).

  In the above embodiment, the card information reading device 1300 corresponds to the arrangement means in the gaming machine B14. In the above embodiment, the receiving unit card reader 1303 corresponds to the pattern reading means in the gaming machine B14. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S3605-S3612 in a receiving part card reading process (refer FIG. 54) corresponds as an analysis means in game machine B14.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 corresponds as a display apparatus in game machine B14. Moreover, in the said embodiment, as a display mode selection means in gaming machine B14, S4002 to S4006 in the processing of S2623, S2626-S2631 in a variation effect setting process (refer FIG. 46), and a jackpot effect setting process (refer FIG. 47). The process of S4008 corresponds.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B14, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine B16 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B14, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines B1 to B14, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  A game machine that uses a game medium to give a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and has a special value different from the game value when the predetermined special value provision condition is satisfied. Special value medium providing means for providing a special value medium, value content detecting means for detecting the content of the special value possessed by the special value medium to be assigned next time by the special value medium providing means, and value content detecting means A gaming machine C1 comprising a condition changing means for changing the special value provision condition for the special value medium to be given next time according to the contents of the special value detected by.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in a game using a game medium, when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game medium is paid out as a game value. The special value is given by the special value giving means.

  Here, the special value content of the special value medium to be assigned next time is detected by the value content detection means, and the special value assignment condition for the special value medium to be assigned next time is detected by the condition changing means. It is changed according to the content of the special value detected by the means.

  Therefore, since the grant frequency of the special value medium changes according to the contents of the special value, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game, and it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time. Become.

  In the above embodiment, the special value medium providing means in the gaming machine C1 includes S4106 and S4109 in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (see FIGS. 48 and 61), and S4406 and S4410 in the detach reach discharge mode process (see FIG. 62). This corresponds to the processing of S4201 to S4203 and S4208 to S4211 in the processing and card ejection processing (see FIG. 49).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the card reader 1453 for discharge corresponds as a value content detection means in the gaming machine C1. In the above embodiment, the condition changing means in the gaming machine C1 includes S4404 and S4107 in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (see FIGS. 48 and 61), and S4404 in the detach reach discharge mode process (see FIG. 62). The process of S4407 corresponds.

  In the gaming machine C1, the condition changing means changes the difficulty level of establishment of the special value provision condition according to the contents of the special value.

  According to the gaming machine C2, since the difficulty level of the special value granting condition is changed according to the content of the special value by the condition changing means, the player can change the content of the special value of each special value medium. Can be sensed.

  In general, it is recognized that a special value medium that is more difficult to establish a special value provision condition and is difficult for a player to acquire is rare and has high value. Therefore, even if a situation where it is difficult for a player to acquire a special value medium due to a change to a special value granting condition with a relatively high difficulty level, the player is difficult to acquire but is rarely It is possible to continue playing while waiting for a special and highly valuable special value. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period of time.

  The gaming machine C1 or C2 includes a counting unit that counts the number of times that the predetermined state occurs, and the special value imparting condition is a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting unit, and the condition changing unit includes: A game characterized in that the number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition is changed according to the content of the special value detected by the value content detecting means. Machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in accordance with the contents of the special value detected by the value contents detecting means, the number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition, that is, the predetermined state is The number of occurrences is changed by the condition changing means. Therefore, since it is possible to change the grant frequency of the special value medium, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game, and it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the game for a longer period.

  In the above embodiment, the counting means in the gaming machine C3 corresponds to the probability variation big hit counter 223v or the outlier reach counter 223x.

  In the gaming machine C3, the counting means counts the number of occurrences of a predetermined gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine C4, since the special value granting condition is based on the occurrence of a common gaming state, the player senses the ease or difficulty of acquiring the special value medium (special value). can do. Therefore, the player's expectation for the acquisition of the special value medium can be raised, and a situation where it is difficult to feel bored with the game can be created.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the second counting means for counting the number of times that a state different from the state for which the number of times is counted by the counting means and the special value imparting condition are counted by the counting means. The selection means for selecting whether the condition depends on the number of times to be counted or the condition according to the number of times counted by the second counting means, and the condition for giving the special value to the condition selected by the selection means A second condition changing means for changing, wherein the condition changing means is changed by the second condition changing means to a condition according to the number of times the special value imparting condition is counted by the counting means. Changes the number of times counted by the first counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition according to the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting means On the other hand, when the special value providing condition is changed by the second condition changing means to a condition corresponding to the number of times counted by the second counting means, the value content detecting means detects the special value providing condition. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the number of times counted by the second counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition is changed according to the contents of the special value.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the special value provision condition is set to a condition corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means (that is, the number of times a certain state has occurred), or the number of times counted by the second counting means (that is, If the selection means selects whether the condition according to the number of times that a state different from the state counted by the counting means occurs), the special value imparting condition is determined by the second condition changing means by the selection means. Changed to selected conditions.

  At this time, when the special value granting condition is changed by the second condition changing means to the condition corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means, according to the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting means, The number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition is changed by the condition changing means. On the other hand, when the special value granting condition is changed by the second condition changing means to a condition corresponding to the number of times counted by the second counting means, the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting means Accordingly, the number of times counted by the second counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition is changed by the condition changing means.

  Therefore, the change of special value provision conditions for obtaining a special value medium (special value) becomes abundant, and it is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to feel bored with the game. Here, by allowing the selection by the selection means to be performed based on the player's intention (for example, an input for instructing which to select), the player can make a special reflection of his / her intention. Value-adding conditions can be selected. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be made easier to acquire the special value medium, so that it is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to feel bored with the game.

  In the embodiment described above, the probability variation big hit counter 223v corresponds to the counting means in the gaming machine C4, and the outreach counter 223x corresponds to the second counting means in the gaming machine C4.

  In the above embodiment, the selection mode in the gaming machine C4 corresponds to the discharge mode change process (see FIG. 59). In the above embodiment, the second condition changing means in the gaming machine C4 corresponds to the process of S4110 in the grant condition establishment confirmation process (see FIG. 61).

  In the gaming machine C5, the counting means and the second counting means hold the number of times counted before when the condition is changed by the second condition changing means. A gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, when the condition is changed by the second condition changing means, the number of times counted by the counting means or the second counting means previously counted is held. Even when the condition is returned after the condition is changed by the condition changing means of 2, it is possible to count from the continuation before the change.

  Therefore, the special value imparting condition is appropriately set to a condition corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means (that is, the number of times a certain state occurs), or the number of times counted by the second counting means (that is, counted by the counting means). The number of special value-adding conditions for obtaining special value media (special value) is abundant, making it difficult to feel bored with the game. A situation can be created.

  The gaming machine C5 or C6 includes an input means for inputting an instruction from a player, and the selection means selects a condition when there is an input from the input means. Machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, since the selection by the selection means can be performed based on the player's intention, the player can select a special value provision condition that reflects his / her intention. Therefore, since the player's consciousness can be easily directed toward acquisition of the special value medium, it is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to feel bored with the game.

  In the above embodiment, the discharge mode change button 1800 corresponds to the input means in the gaming machine C7.

  One of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine C9 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is sectional drawing which shows a privilege coin payout apparatus typically. (A) And (b) is a perspective view which shows the bottom member in a privilege coin payment apparatus, (c) is a perspective view which shows a standby member. It is typical sectional drawing for demonstrating payout of the privilege coin by a privilege coin payout apparatus. (A) is a front view of a privilege coin, (b) is sectional drawing in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire in (a). It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a schematic diagram which shows the actual screen and effective line setting in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a change start process executed in the pattern change process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the coin payout setting process performed in the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the complete removal count process performed in the coin payout setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change production | presentation setting process performed in the decoration design change display process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process performed in the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stop stop symbol setting process performed in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the coin payout process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payout coin detection process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the receiving part coin detection process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing which shows typically an internal structure at the time of seeing a card information reading apparatus from the upper surface side, (b) is an internal structure at the time of seeing a card information reading apparatus from the side surface side. It is sectional drawing shown typically, (c) is sectional drawing which shows typically the case where a privilege card is mounted | worn with the card information reader. (A) is sectional drawing which shows typically an internal structure at the time of seeing a privilege card discharge apparatus from the side surface side, (b) is a typical front view which looked at the privilege card discharge apparatus from the discharge port side. (C) is a top view schematically showing the internal structure when the privilege card discharge device is viewed from the top surface side. It is typical sectional drawing for demonstrating discharge operation of the privilege card by a privilege card discharge apparatus. (A) is a front view of a privilege card, (b) is a back view of a privilege card, (c) is sectional drawing in the X8c-X8c line | wire in (a). It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the code pattern formed in a card | curd information area. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. 44 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 43. 44 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 43. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect setting process performed in the display setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect setting process performed in the display setting process of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a grant condition establishment confirmation process executed in the main process of FIG. 43. FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a card ejection process executed in the main process of FIG. 43. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a discharge completion confirmation process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 50. FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a discharge card check process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 50. FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a receiving unit card check process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 50. FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a receiving unit card reading process executed in the receiving unit card confirmation process of FIG. 53. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a discharge mode change process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 58. FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a discharge completion confirmation process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 58. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the provision condition satisfaction confirmation process of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a detach reach discharge mode process executed in the application condition establishment confirmation process of FIG. 61. FIG.

Explanation of symbols

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
223v Probability jackpot counter (counting means)
223x outreach counter (second counting means)
1453 Card reader for discharge (value content detection means)

Claims (4)

In a gaming machine that uses a game medium to play a game and that gives a game value when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied,
Special value medium providing means for providing a special value medium having a special value different from the gaming value when a predetermined special value provision condition is satisfied;
Value content detection means for detecting the content of the special value of the special value medium that is given next time by the special value medium provision means;
A gaming machine comprising: condition changing means for changing the special value granting condition for the special value medium to be given next time according to the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting means . A counting means for counting the number of times the predetermined state occurs;
The special value imparting condition is a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting means,
The condition changing means changes the number of times counted by the counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition according to the contents of the special value detected by the value content detecting means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is provided. Second counting means for counting the number of times that a state different from the state to be counted is counted by the counting means;
Selecting means for selecting whether the special value imparting condition is a condition according to the number of times counted by the counting means or a condition according to the number of times counted by the second counting means;
A second condition changing means for changing the special value imparting condition to a condition selected by the selecting means;
The condition changing means detects the value detected by the value content detecting means when the second condition changing means is changed to a condition corresponding to the number of times the special value providing condition is counted by the counting means. Depending on the content of the special value, the number of times counted by the first counting means required to satisfy the special value provision condition is changed, while the special value provision is performed by the second condition changing means. When the condition is changed to a condition according to the number of times counted by the second counting means, the special value granting condition is satisfied according to the contents of the special value detected by the value contents detecting means. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the number of times counted by the second counting means required for the purpose is changed. 4. The counting means and the second counting means hold the number of times counted before when the condition is changed by the second condition changing means. The gaming machine described.

Images